Project Manual - Buildings 100, 300, 400, 500, 600 - Sugarloaf Market

PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE
CONSTRUCTION OF
Buildings 100,300,400,500 and 600
Sugarloaf Marketplace
Sugarloaf and Peachtree Industrial Blvd
DULUTH, GEORGIA
04 May 2015
3000 Royal Blvd South | Alpharetta, GA | 30022
P: 770.569.1706 | F: 770.569.1786
www.poharchitects.com
20-14084.00
SUGARLOAF MARKETPLACE
4 MAY 2015
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
012500
013200
013300
014000
014200
015000
016000
017300
017419
017700
017839
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SUBSTITUION PROCEDURES
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
REFERENCES
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
EXECUTION
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
03
0313116
033000
CONCRETE
TERMITE CONTROL
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
04
042113
042200
047000
MASONRY
BRICK MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
05
051200
052100
053100
054000
055000
METALS
STRUCTURAL STEEL
STEEL JOIST
STEEL DECK
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
06
061000
061600
WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

ROUGH CARPENTRY
SHEATHING
07
071113
072100
072413
075423
076100
076200
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
BUILDING INSULATION
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
SHEET METAL ROOFING
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 1
20-14084.00
077200
079200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
JOINT SEALANTS
08
081113
081416
084113
088000
DOORS AND WINDOWS

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
GLAZING
09
092111
092900
095113
099113
FINISHES
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GYPSUM BOARD
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
EXTERIOR PAINTING
10
102800
SPECIALTIES
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
15
15050
15070
15250
15300
15430
15781
15870
15880
15890
15910
15951
15990
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
MECHANICAL INSULATION
FIRE PROTECTION
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
POWER VENTILATORS
AIR DISTRIBUTION
DUCTWORK
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
CONTROLS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
16
16050
16110
16120
16130
16140
16170
16195
16420
16430
16440
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
RACEWAYS
CONDUCTORS
BOXES
WIRING DEVICES
MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SERVICE ENTRANCE
MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
DISCONNECT SWTICHES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4 MAY 2015
TOC - 2
20-14084.00
16450
16470
16475
16500
16740
4 MAY 2015
GROUNDING
PANELBOARDS
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
LIGHTING
TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.
2.
1.4
Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 1
20-14084.00
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC-ES.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in
delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a.
1.5
4 MAY 2015
Forms of Acceptance:
Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
012500 - 2
20-14084.00
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
4 MAY 2015
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within
45 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume.
Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
012500 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
1.3
Startup construction schedule.

Contractor's construction schedule.
Construction schedule updating reports.
Daily construction reports.
Material location reports.
Site condition reports.
Special reports.
1.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
2.
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
3.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
C.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine
when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
013200 - 1
20-14084.00
F.
4 MAY 2015
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1.
2.
3.
1.4
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1.
B.
Startup construction schedule.

1.
C.
Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
1.
D.
Working electronic copy of schedule file and an PDF electronic file.
Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and
date on label.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for
each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource
loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if
known.
Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the
Work until most recent Application for Payment.
E.
Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
F.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
G.
Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
H.
Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
I.
Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
013200 - 2
20-14084.00
1.5
4 MAY 2015
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
final completion.
B.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days, unless

specifically allowed by Architect.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time:
Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Coordination with existing construction.

Limitations of continued occupancies.
Uninterruptible services.
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
Use of premises restrictions.
Provisions for future construction.
Seasonal variations.
013200 - 3
20-14084.00
h.
5.
2.2
See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.
On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and
actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1.
F.
Structural completion.
Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
Permanent space enclosure.
Completion of mechanical installation.
Completion of electrical installation.
Substantial Completion.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the
following interim milestones:
1.
E.
Environmental control.
Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
D.
4 MAY 2015
Unresolved issues.
Unanswered Requests for Information.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
Notations on returned submittals.
Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is [14] <Insert number> or
more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery
schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to
achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A.
Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within

seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
013200 - 4
20-14084.00
2.3
4 MAY 2015
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the
Work. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received
since the start of Project.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1.
2.4
For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 5 percent increments within time bar.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded,
time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be

accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for commencement of the
Work.
a.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not
excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates,
regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
information.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days
and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using
the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Preparation and processing of submittals.

Mobilization and demobilization.
Purchase of materials.
Delivery.
Fabrication.
Utility interruptions.
Installation.
Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
Testing.
Punch list and final completion.
Activities occurring following final completion.
013200 - 5
20-14084.00
2.
3.
4.
Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with
Contract milestone dates.
Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as
necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
a.
5.
4 MAY 2015
Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.
Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on

the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's
approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under
main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance
manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents and demonstration and training
(if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.
a.
b.
Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by

Architect.
Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.
D.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect
of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
E.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
F.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.

Description of activity.
Main events of activity.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
Early and late start dates.
Early and late finish dates.
Activity duration in workdays.
Total float or slack time.
Average size of workforce.
Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Identification of activities that have changed.

Changes in early and late start dates.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
Changes in the critical path.
Changes in total float or slack time.
Changes in the Contract Time.
013200 - 6
20-14084.00
2.5
4 MAY 2015
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
B.
Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.6
List of subcontractors at Project site.

List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
Equipment at Project site.
Material deliveries.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events (see special reports).
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial completions and occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.
Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.
Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information.
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within [one] <Insert number> day(s) of an
occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
013200 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled
progress meeting.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
013200 - 8
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the
schedule of values.
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
C.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from
another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols.
An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal
and external users are able to access files.
D.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
013300 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required
to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead
time for manufacture or fabrication.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a.
4.
Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.5
Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
for submittals.
Scheduled date for first submittal.

Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category: Action; informational.
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A.
Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
C.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
013300 - 2
20-14084.00
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner

as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15
days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being
returned to Contractor.
Paper Submittals :
identification.
1.
2.
3.
4 MAY 2015
Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title
block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Project name.
Date.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
g.
h.
i.
j.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point
(e.g., 061000.01.A).
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
4.
Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,
initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
5.
Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately
for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect
will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
a.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following
information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
013300 - 3
20-14084.00
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
E.

Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
Electronic Submittals (Preferred Method):

electronic submittal file as follows:
1.
2.
4.
Identify and incorporate information in each
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a.
3.
4 MAY 2015
File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by
a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
of multiple items.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Related physical samples submitted directly.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Other necessary identification.
Remarks.
F.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
G.
Deviations and Additional Information:

On an attached separate sheet, prepared on
Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than
those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the
Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification
information as related submittal.
H.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
013300 - 4
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4 MAY 2015
Note date and content of previous submittal.

Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1.
Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site
established for Project.
a.
2.
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a.
3.
4.
5.
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
a.
b.
B.
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.
Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
013300 - 5
20-14084.00
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
PDF electronic file.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.

following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Include the
Identification of products.
Schedules.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30
by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).
Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a.
D.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

Submit Product Data in the following format:
a.
C.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

Manufacturer's product specifications.
Color charts.
Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
4 MAY 2015
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories

together in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Generic description of Sample.

Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
013300 - 6
20-14084.00
3.
4.
5.
For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a.
6.
Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples.

Sample sets; remainder will be returned.
1)
2)
E.
4 MAY 2015
Architect will retain one
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
Submit product schedule in the following format:
a.
F.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200

"Construction Progress Documentation."
G.
Application for Payment and Schedule of Values:

Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."
H.
Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
Comply with requirements specified in
013300 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
I.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
J.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
K.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
L.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
M.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
N.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
O.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P.
Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q.
Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
R.
Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name of evaluation organization.

Date of evaluation.
Time period when report is in effect.
Product and manufacturers' names.
Description of product.
Test procedures and results.
Limitations of use.
S.
Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
T.
Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
013300 - 8
20-14084.00
U.
2.2
4 MAY 2015
Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
B.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, signed and sealed by the
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to
Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
No exceptions noted.
Note markings.
Rejected.
Confirm with corrected copies.
Resubmit.
013300 - 9
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
C.
Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
013300 - 10
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed
construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities
performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1.
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from
the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and
subassemblies.
014000 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products
and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified
criteria.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of
the Work and for completed Work.
H.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,

Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
J.
1.4
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that
requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with
the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently
equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum
quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply
with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for
the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations,
indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1.
2.
Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
014000 - 2
20-14084.00
1.6
4 MAY 2015
A.
Contractor's Quality-Control Plan:

responsibilities.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
C.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.7
For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the
Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports:

Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements
and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
014000 - 3
20-14084.00
7.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
4 MAY 2015
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other
1.
D.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.
Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to

those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted
in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the
system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated
for this Project.
F.
Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
G.
Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
014000 - 4
20-14084.00
1.
2.
4 MAY 2015
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
I.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
J.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for
compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
K.
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform
same tasks for Project.
Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods
of construction indicated for the completed Work.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests
and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with
or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form
of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
Notify Architect fourteen days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at Project.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a.
6.
7.
Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging

the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
014000 - 5
20-14084.00
L.
1.9
4 MAY 2015
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop
Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups
are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the
Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing
or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services:

Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
D.
Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
014000 - 6
20-14084.00
F.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.
5.
A.
Access to the Work.

Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
1.10
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are
conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
H.
4 MAY 2015
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
G.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as
required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Section and in
Statement of Special Inspections indicated on Drawings, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
014000 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A.
Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Date test or inspection was conducted.

Description of the Work tested or inspected.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend
restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in
Section 017300 "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.
014000 - 8
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.3
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards:
Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents
unless otherwise indicated.
REFERENCES
014200 - 1
20-14084.00
C.
4 MAY 2015
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1.
1.4
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson
Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the U.S."
B.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA
Aluminum Association (The)

www.aluminum.org
(703) 358-2960
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council

www.aabchq.com
(202) 737-0202
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association

www.aamanet.org
(847) 303-5664
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials
www.transportation.org
(202) 624-5800
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

www.aatcc.org
(919) 549-8141
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America

www.airbarrier.org
(866) 956-5888
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association

www.abma-dc.org
(202) 367-1155
ACI
American Concrete Institute

www.concrete.org
(248) 848-3700
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association

www.concrete-pipe.org
(972) 506-7216
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)

www.aeic.org
(205) 257-2530
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association

www.afandpa.org
(800) 878-8878
(202) 463-2700
AGA
American Gas Association

www.aga.org
(202) 824-7000
REFERENCES
014200 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers

www.aham.org
(202) 872-5955
AHRI
Air-Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute, The

www.ahrinet.org
(703) 524-8800
AI
Asphalt Institute
www.asphaltinstitute.org
(859) 288-4960
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)

www.aia.org
(800) 242-3837
(202) 626-7300
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction

www.aisc.org
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute

www.steel.org
(202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction

www.aitc-glulam.org
(303) 792-9559
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated

www.alsc.org
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.

www.amca.org
(847) 394-0150
ANSI
American National Standards Institute

www.ansi.org
(202) 293-8020
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.

www.aosaseed.com
(405) 780-7372
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association

www.apawood.org
(253) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association

www.archprecast.org
(239) 454-6989
API
American Petroleum Institute

www.api.org
(202) 682-8000
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute

www.ari.org
(703) 524-8800
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association

www.asphaltroofing.org
(202) 207-0917
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers

www.asce.org
(800) 548-2723
(703) 295-6300
ASCE/SEI
American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering

Institute
(See ASCE)
REFERENCES
014200 - 3
20-14084.00
ASHRAE
4 MAY 2015
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers

www.ashrae.org
(800) 527-4723
ASME
ASME International
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
www.asme.org
(800) 843-2763
(973) 882-1170
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering

www.asse-plumbing.org
(440) 835-3040
ASTM
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
(610) 832-9500
ATIS
Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions

www.atis.org
(202) 628-6380
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association

(Now WCMA)
AWCI
Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry

www.awci.org
(703) 534-8300
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute

www.awinet.org
(571) 323-3636
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association

(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)
www.awpa.com
(205) 733-4077
AWS
American Welding Society

www.aws.org
(800) 443-9353
(305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association

www.awwa.org
(800) 926-7337
(303) 794-7711
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

www.buildershardware.com
(212) 297-2122
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)

www.bia.org
(703) 620-0010
BICSI
BICSI, Inc.
www.bicsi.org
(800) 242-7405
(813) 979-1991
BIFMA
BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
www.bifma.com
(616) 285-3963
BISSC
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee

www.bissc.org
(866) 342-4772
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council

www.carpetcushion.org
(610) 527-3880
REFERENCES
(404) 636-8400
014200 - 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
CDA
Copper Development Association

www.copper.org
(800) 232-3282
(212) 251-7200
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association

www.canelect.ca
(613) 230-9263
CEA
Consumer Electronics Association

www.ce.org
(866) 858-1555
(703) 907-7600
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
(216) 241-7333
CGA
Compressed Gas Association

www.cganet.com
(703) 788-2700
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association

www.cellulose.org
(888) 881-2462
(937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association

www.cisca.org
(630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

www.cispi.org
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute

www.chainlinkinfo.org
(301) 596-2583
CPA
Composite Panel Association

www.pbmdf.com
(703) 724-1128
CRI
Carpet and Rug Institute (The)

www.carpet-rug.com
(800) 882-8846
(706) 278-3176
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council

www.coolroofs.org
(866) 465-2523
(510) 485-7175
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

www.crsi.org
(847) 517-1200
(800) 328-6306
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council

www.coolroofs.org
(866) 465-2523
(510) 485-7175
CSA
Canadian Standards Association

www.csa.ca
(800) 463-6727
(416) 747-4000
CSA
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
www.csa-international.org
(866) 797-4272
(416) 747-4000
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)

www.csinet.org
(800) 689-2900
(703) 684-0300
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau

www.cedarbureau.org
(604) 820-7700
REFERENCES
014200 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org
(281) 583-4087
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute

www.dhi.org
(703) 222-2010
ECA
Electrical Components Association

www.ec-central.org
(703)907-8024
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance

www.eia.org
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association

www.eima.com
(800) 294-3462
(770) 968-7945
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee

http://content.asce.org/ejcdc/
(703) 295-6000
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.

www.ejma.org
(914) 332-0040
ESD
ESD Association
(Electrostatic Discharge Association)
www.esda.org
(315) 339-6937
ETL SEMCO
Intertek ETL SEMCO

(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)
www.intertek-etlsemko.com
(800) 967-5352
FIBA
Federation Internationale de Basketball

(The International Basketball Federation)
www.fiba.com
41 22 545 00 00
FIVB
Federation Internationale de Volleyball

(The International Volleyball Federation)
www.fivb.ch
41 21 345 35 35
FM Approvals
FM Approvals LLC
www.fmglobal.com
(781) 762-4300
FM Global
FM Global
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
www.fmglobal.com
(401) 275-3000
FRSA
Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors

Association, Inc.
www.floridaroof.com
(407) 671-3772
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association

www.fluidsealing.com
(610) 971-4850
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council

www.fsc.org
49 228 367 66 0
GA
Gypsum Association
REFERENCES
014200 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
www.gypsum.org
(301) 277-8686
GANA
Glass Association of North America

www.glasswebsite.com
(785) 271-0208
GRI
(Part of GSI)
GS
Green Seal
www.greenseal.org
(202) 872-6400
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute
www.geosynthetic-institute.org
(610) 522-8440
HI
Hydronics Institute
www.gamanet.org
(908) 464-8200
HI/GAMA
Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association

Division of Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
Institute (AHRI)
www.ahrinet.org
(908) 464-8200
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association

www.hpva.org
(703) 435-2900
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.

www.hpwhite.com
(410) 838-6550
IAPSC
International Association of Professional Security Consultants (515) 282-8192

www.iapsc.org
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials

www.iccsafe.org
(888) 422-7233
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.

www.icea.net
(770) 830-0369
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.

www.icri.org
(847) 827-0830
ICPA
International Cast Polymer Association

www.icpa-hq.org
(703) 525-0320
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission

www.iec.ch
41 22 919 02 11
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)

www.ieee.org
(212) 419-7900
IES
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

www.iesna.org
(703) 525-0320
IEST
Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology

www.iest.org
(847) 255-1561
REFERENCES
014200 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance

www.igmaonline.org
(613) 233-1510
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.

www.iliai.com
(812) 275-4426
ISA
Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The

www.isa.org
(919) 549-8411
ISO
International Organization for Standardization

www.iso.ch
41 22 749 01 11
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association

www.issfa.net
(877) 464-7732
(801) 341-7360
ITS
Intertek Testing Service NA

(Now ETL SEMCO)
ITU
International Telecommunication Union

www.itu.int/home
41 22 730 51 11
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association

www.kcma.org
(703) 264-1690
LGSEA
Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association

www.arcat.com
(202) 263-4488
LMA
Laminating Materials Association

(Now part of CPA)
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute

www.lightning.org
(800) 488-6864
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association

www.mbma.com
(216) 241-7333
MCA
Metal Construction Association

www.metalconstruction.org
(847) 375-4718
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.

www.maplefloor.org
(888) 480-9138
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.

www.metalframingmfg.org
(312) 644-6610
MH
Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America

www.mhia.org
(800) 345-1815
(704) 676-1190
MIA
Marble Institute of America

www.marble-institute.com
(440) 250-9222
MPI
Master Painters Institute
(888) 674-8937
REFERENCES
014200 - 8
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
www.paintinfo.com
(604) 298-7578
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and

Fittings Industry Inc.
www.mss-hq.com
(703) 281-6613
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

www.naamm.org
(630) 942-6591
NACE
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
www.nace.org
(800) 797-6223
(281) 228-6200
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association

www.nadca.com
(202) 737-2926
NAGWS
National Association for Girls and Women in Sport
(800) 213-7193, ext.

453
www.aahperd.org/nagws/
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association

www.naima.org
(703) 684-0084
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.

www.nbgqa.com
(800) 557-2848
NCAA
National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)

www.ncaa.org
(317) 917-6222
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association

www.ncma.org
(703) 713-1900
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association

www.ncta.com
(202) 222-2300
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau

www.nebb.org
(301) 977-3698
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association

www.necanet.org
(301) 657-3110
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association

www.nelma.org
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association

www.nema.org
(703) 841-3200
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association

www.netaworld.org
(888) 300-6382
(269) 488-6382
NFHS
National Federation of State High School Associations

www.nfhs.org
(317) 972-6900
NFPA
NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
www.nfpa.org
(800) 344-3555
(617) 770-3000
REFERENCES
014200 - 9
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council

www.nfrc.org
(301) 589-1776
NGA
National Glass Association

www.glass.org
(866) 342-5642
(703) 442-4890
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association

www.natlhardwood.org
(800) 933-0318
(901) 377-1818
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority

www.nlga.org
(604) 524-2393
NOFMA
NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association

(901) 526-5016
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)
www.nofma.org
NOMMA
National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association

www.nomma.org
(888) 516-8585
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association

www.nrca.net
(800) 323-9545
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association

www.nrmca.org
(888) 846-7622
(301) 587-1400
NSF
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
www.nsf.org
(800) 673-6275
(734) 769-8010
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association

www.nssga.org
(800) 342-1415
(703) 525-8788
NTMA
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)

www.ntma.com
(800) 323-9736
(540) 751-0930
NWFA
National Wood Flooring Association

www.nwfa.org
(800) 422-4556
(636) 519-9663
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute

www.pci.org
(312) 786-0300
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute

www.pdionline.org
(800) 589-8956
(978) 557-0720
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute

http://pgi-tp.cee.uiuc.edu
(217) 333-3929
PTI
Post-Tensioning Institute
www.post-tensioning.org
(248) 848-3180
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections

www.boltcouncil.org
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute

www.rfci.com
REFERENCES
(706) 882-3833
014200 - 10
20-14084.00
RIS
4 MAY 2015
Redwood Inspection Service

www.redwoodinspection.com
(925) 935-1499
SAE
SAE International
www.sae.org
(877) 606-7323
(724) 776-4841
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District

www.aqmd.com
(909) 396-2000
SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers

www.scte.org
(800) 542-5040
(610) 363-6888
SDI
Steel Deck Institute

www.sdi.org
(847) 458-4647
SDI
Steel Door Institute

www.steeldoor.org
(440) 899-0010
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association

www.sefalabs.com
(877) 294-5424
(516) 294-5424
SEI/ASCE
Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil

Engineers
(See ASCE)
SIA
Security Industry Association

www.siaonline.org
(866) 817-8888
(703) 683-2075
SJI
Steel Joist Institute

www.steeljoist.org
(843) 626-1995
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association

www.smacentral.org
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'

National Association
www.smacna.org
(703) 803-2980
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers

www.smpte.org
(914) 761-1100
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry,
Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
(800) 523-6154
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)

www.spib.org
(850) 434-2611
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Industry

www.spri.org
(781) 647-7026
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America

www.ssina.com
(800) 982-0355
(202) 342-8630
REFERENCES
014200 - 11
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings

www.sspc.org
(877) 281-7772
(412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute

www.steeltank.com
(847) 438-8265
SWI
Steel Window Institute

www.steelwindows.com
(216) 241-7333
SWPA
Submersible Wastewater Pump Association

www.swpa.org
(847) 681-1868
TCA
Tilt-Up Concrete Association

www.tilt-up.org
(319) 895-6911
TCNA
Tile Council of North America, Inc.

www.tileusa.com
(864) 646-8453
TEMA
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association

www.tema.org
(914) 332-0040
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic

Industries Alliance
www.tiaonline.org
(703) 907-7700
TMS
The Masonry Society

www.masonrysociety.org
(303) 939-9700
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.

www.tpinst.org
(703) 683-1010
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International

www.turfgrasssod.org
(800) 405-8873
(847) 649-5555
TRI
Tile Roofing Institute

www.tileroofing.org
(312) 670-4177
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

www.ul.com
(877) 854-3577
(847) 272-8800
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association

www.uni-bell.org
(972) 243-3902
USAV
USA Volleyball
www.usavolleyball.org
(888) 786-5539
(719) 228-6800
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council

www.usgbc.org
(800) 795-1747
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.

www.usitt.org
(800) 938-7488
(315) 463-6463
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association

www.wastec.org
(800) 424-2869
(202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
(800) 283-1486
REFERENCES
014200 - 12
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
www.wclib.org
(503) 639-0651
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association

www.wcmanet.org
(212) 297-2122
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door
Association)
www.wdma.com
(800) 223-2301
(312) 321-6802
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of

California)
www.wicnet.org
(916) 372-9943
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association

www.wmmpa.com
(800) 550-7889
(530) 661-9591
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association

www.wsrca.com
(800) 725-0333
(650) 570-5441
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association

www.wwpa.org
(503) 224-3930
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
DIN
Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.

www.din.de
49 30 2601-0
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

www.iapmo.org
(909) 472-4100
ICC
International Code Council

www.iccsafe.org
(888) 422-7233
ICC-ES
ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.

www.icc-es.org
(800) 423-6587
(562) 699-0543
D.
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
COE
Army Corps of Engineers

www.usace.army.mil
(202) 761-0011
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission

www.cpsc.gov
(800) 638-2772
(301) 504-7923
DOC
Department of Commerce
www.commerce.gov
(202) 482-2000
DOD
Department of Defense
(215) 697-6257
REFERENCES
014200 - 13
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DOE
Department of Energy
www.energy.gov
(202) 586-9220
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency

www.epa.gov
(202) 272-0167
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration

www.faa.gov
(866) 835-5322
FCC
Federal Communications Commission

www.fcc.gov
(888) 225-5322
FDA
Food and Drug Administration

www.fda.gov
(888) 463-6332
GSA
General Services Administration

www.gsa.gov
(800) 488-3111
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development

www.hud.gov
(202) 708-1112
LBL
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory

www.lbl.gov
(510) 486-4000
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program

(See TRB)
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology

www.nist.gov
(301) 975-6478
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration

www.osha.gov
(800) 321-6742
(202) 693-1999
PBS
Public Buildings Service

(See GSA)
PHS
Office of Public Health and Science

http://www.hhs.gov/ophs/
(202) 690-7694
RUS
Rural Utilities Service

(See USDA)
(202) 720-9540
SD
State Department
www.state.gov
(202) 647-4000
TRB
Transportation Research Board

http://gulliver.trb.org
(202) 334-2934
USDA
Department of Agriculture
www.usda.gov
(202) 720-2791
USP
U.S. Pharmacopeia
www.usp.org
(800) 227-8772
REFERENCES
014200 - 14
20-14084.00
USPS
E.
Postal Service
www.usps.com
4 MAY 2015
(202) 268-2000
Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to
change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
(800) 8722253
(202) 2720080
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

Available from U.S. Access Board
www.access-board.gov
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations

Available from Government Printing Office
(866) 5121800
(202) 5121800
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
DOD
Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards
(215) 6972664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point

DSCC
Defense Supply Center Columbus

(See FS)
FED-STD
Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS
Federal Specification
(215) 6972664

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil/
Available from Defense Standardization Program
www.dsp.dla.mil
Available from General Services Administration
(202) 6198925
www.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences
(202) 2897800
www.wbdg.org/ccb
FTMS
Federal Test Method Standard

(See FS)
MIL
(See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD
(See MILSPEC)
REFERENCES
014200 - 15
20-14084.00
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards
4 MAY 2015
(215) 6972664

UFAS
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

Available from Access Board
(800) 8722253
(202) 2720080
www.access-board.gov
F.
State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home

Furnishings and Thermal Insulation
www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti
(800) 9525210
(916) 5742041
CCR
(916) 3236815
California Code of Regulations

www.calregs.com
CDHS California Department of Health Services
(916) 4454171
www.dhcs.ca.gov
CDPH California Department of Public Health, Indoor Air Quality Section
www.cal-iaq.org
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission
(415) 7032782
www.cpuc.ca.gov
TFS
Texas Forest Service

Forest Resource Development
(979) 4586606
http://txforestservice.tamu.edu
REFERENCES
014200 - 16
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection
facilities.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in
the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction
operations.
C.
Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction
operations.
D.
Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities
for construction operations.
1.4
A.
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention
program.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
015000 - 1
20-14084.00
1.6
4 MAY 2015
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use
as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanizedsteel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts;
minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts,
with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for
supporting posts.
B.
Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with
flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.
C.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office:

Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner,
Architect, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to
accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and
orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 15 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one
receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-)
square tack and marker boards.
Drinking water and private toilet.
Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C).
Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
1.
Store combustible materials apart from building.
015000 - 2
20-14084.00
2.3
4 MAY 2015
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
3.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and
application.
Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in
system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are
no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
B.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect
on completed installations or elements being installed.
F.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient
condition required and minimize energy consumption.
015000 - 3
20-14084.00
1.
4 MAY 2015
Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to

level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
G.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
H.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
I.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a.
b.
2.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
J.
Police and fire departments.

Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Owner's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide a computer in the primary field office adequate for
use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic
communications
1.
Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet.
2.
Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista
Business.
3.
Productivity Software:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
3.3
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
Provide one telephone line(s) for Owner's use.
Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook.

Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher.
WinZip 7.0 or higher.
Printer:
"All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing,
photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.
Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall,
providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A.
General: Comply with the following:
015000 - 4
20-14084.00
1.
2.
B.
Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to
ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion.
Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as

required to minimize dust.
Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas
in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads
and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved
areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
4 MAY 2015
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations.
1.
C.
Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately
before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before
installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving."
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.
2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
E.
Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
F.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
G.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
2.
Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as directed by Owner.

Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a.
3.
Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
015000 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
H.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."
I.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
J.
Temporary Elevator Use: " Section 142413 "Hydraulic Freight Elevators," for temporary use of
new elevators.
K.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
L.
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted,
provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial
Completion.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,
waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent
properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and
requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,
whichever is more stringent.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and
sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.
D.
Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers
in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater
from heavy rains.
E.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
F.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
015000 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
G.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, verify extent of existing site
enclosure fence and furnish and install additional site enclosure fence in a manner that will
prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1.
2.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient
to accommodate construction operations.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
H.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
I.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
J.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
K.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
L.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate

temporary enclosures.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at
Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A.
Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible
signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B.
Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject
to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Protect porous materials from water damage.

Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
Remove standing water from decks.
015000 - 7
20-14084.00
5.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high
organic content, into partially enclosed building.
Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
Discard or replace water-damaged material.
Do not install material that is wet.
Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
a.
b.
c.
3.6
4 MAY 2015
Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of
moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1.
D.
Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsumbased products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet
for 48 hours are considered defective.
Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during
construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of
exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture
levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured
moisture level within 48 hours.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse,
limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation,

and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to
avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
015000 - 8
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4 MAY 2015
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration
into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove
soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove
materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and
other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace
street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
015000 - 9
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products;
special warranties; and comparable products.
B.
1.
Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
2.
Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken
from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment,"
"system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.4
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product

is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model
number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for
purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the
specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
016000 - 1
20-14084.00
1.
2.
Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable

Products" Article.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
B.
1.5
4 MAY 2015
Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products
for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously
selected products were also options.
1.
2.
1.6
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible
with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:

1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to
determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
016000 - 2
20-14084.00
5.
6.
1.7
4 MAY 2015
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific
rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed
for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or
approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures:
016000 - 3
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
Products:
a.
b.
4.
b.
C.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide

a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide
a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision
will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1.
D.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers

and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements.
Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
Manufacturers:
a.
5.
4 MAY 2015
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified
requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for
proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
016000 - 4
20-14084.00
2.2
4 MAY 2015
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product
when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and
that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
016000 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.3
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
1.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
2.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
3.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other

work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4
A.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
EXECUTION
017300 - 1
20-14084.00
1.5
4 MAY 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services
of the kind indicated.
B.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or
increase deflection
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements
include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not
limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
C.
Primary operational systems and equipment.

Fire separation assemblies.
Air or smoke barriers.
Fire-suppression systems.
Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
Control systems.
Communication systems.
Fire-detection and -alarm systems.
Conveying systems.
Electrical wiring systems.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

Membranes and flashings.
Exterior curtain-wall construction.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
EXECUTION
017300 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of inplace materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and
verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the
Work.
1.
2.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
C.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work
is required by other Sections, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.2
Description of the Work.

List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of
Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings,
in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify
Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted
surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish limits on use of Project site.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and
topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical
work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level
foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
EXECUTION
017300 - 4
20-14084.00
B.
4 MAY 2015
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1.
2.
C.
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect
before proceeding.
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
2.
3.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction
to its original condition.
D.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
E.
Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing
significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by
land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned
as shown on the survey.
1.
2.
3.5
Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and
90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION
017300 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory
prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and
type required for load conditions.
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed
with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.
B.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
C.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
D.
Existing Utility Services: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated,
or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied
areas.
E.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
EXECUTION
017300 - 6
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering
and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1.
2.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of
patching and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
3.7
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
G.
4 MAY 2015
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
EXECUTION
Enforce
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
017300 - 7
20-14084.00
2.
3.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a.
4.
4 MAY 2015
Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors
are working concurrently.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.

Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire
work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down
sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning
units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without
binding.
EXECUTION
017300 - 8
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements."
3.9
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
EXECUTION
017300 - 9
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.
Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from
partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of
hazardous waste.
2.
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
3.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and
removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in

preparation for reuse.
E.
Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in

another facility.
F.
Salvage and Reuse:

Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
017419 - 1
20-14084.00
1.4
4 MAY 2015
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work.
Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and
incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.
1.
Demolition Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Asphalt paving.
Concrete.
Concrete reinforcing steel.
Structural and miscellaneous steel.
Construction Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Masonry and CMU.

Lumber.
Wood sheet materials.
Metals.
Roofing.
Insulation.
Gypsum board.
Piping.
Electrical conduit.
Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph
above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging
materials:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1.5
Paper.
Cardboard.
Boxes.
Plastic sheet and film.
Polystyrene packaging.
Wood crates.
Plastic pails.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A.
General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate
quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management
plan.
B.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator
017419 - 2
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4.
4 MAY 2015
Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
Work.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated
location where materials separation will be performed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
1.
Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B.
Training:
Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1.
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
C.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1.
2.
3.2
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and
dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
C.
Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
017419 - 3
20-14084.00
D.
Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to
approved construction waste management plan.
1.
Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each
container and bin.
a.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
4 MAY 2015
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
if found.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
Stockpile materials away from construction area. Store components off the ground and
protect from the weather.
Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A.
Asphalt Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) size.

1.
Crush asphaltic concrete paving and screen to comply with requirements in

Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for use as general fill.
B.
Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility. (Optional)
C.
Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
1.
2.
D.
Metals: Separate metals by type.

1.
2.
3.4
Pulverize concrete to maximum 4-inch (100-mm) size.

Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth
Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase.
Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A.
Packaging:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
017419 - 4
20-14084.00
3.5
4 MAY 2015
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
017419 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but
not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.3
Substantial Completion procedures.

Final completion procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Repair of the Work.
1.
Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
2.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C.
Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
20-14084.00
1.6
4 MAY 2015
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are
incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.

Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are
incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include
occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record
documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar
final record information.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner.
Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a

minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with
inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's
list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before
certificate will be issued.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
20-14084.00
1.
2.
1.7
4 MAY 2015
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A.
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after
inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before
certificate will be issued.
1.
1.8
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment

Procedures."
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and
dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed
or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A.
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary,
areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding
from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a.
b.
MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

Two paper copies.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
20-14084.00
1.9
4 MAY 2015
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(215-by-280-mm) paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator
of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health
or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
20-14084.00
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
C.
3.2
4 MAY 2015
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities
and Controls." Prepare written report.
REPAIR OF THE WORK

A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting
operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide
replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore
damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1.
2.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
20-14084.00
3.
4.
4 MAY 2015
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Miscellaneous record submittals.
1.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a.
Initial Submittal:
1)
Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints.
2)
Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
b.
Final Submittal:
1)
Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and two set(s) of prints.
2)
Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were
recorded.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications,

including addenda and contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
1.
D.
Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous recordkeeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
017839 - 1
20-14084.00
E.
4 MAY 2015
Reports: Submit written report monthly, indicating items incorporated into project record
documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions,
field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.

Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below first floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
017839 - 2
20-14084.00
B.
2.
New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting
an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record
the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly
prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for
formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files
that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
4 MAY 2015
Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record
Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop
Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.
1.
C.
Project name.
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
017839 - 3
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.4
4 MAY 2015
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B.
Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
017839 - 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 042113 - BRICK MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Face brick.
2.
Mortar and grout.
3.
Ties and anchors.
4.
Embedded flashing.
5.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry
anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.
2.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for
brick masonry.
3.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and
for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following:

1.
2.
C.
List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers,
source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix
proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.
1.
D.
Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup
constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations
are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.
Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1.
Masonry units.
a.
Include data on material properties.
042113 - 1
20-14084.00
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
1.4
4 MAY 2015
For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within
specified tolerances.
For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.
Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and

equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single
source from single manufacturer for each product required.
B.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
C.
Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements
in the Contract Documents.
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in each mockup.
Include lower corner of storefront opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup
as shown on mockup drawing.
Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in corner of
exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup,
with a 12-inch (300-mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry
above half of flashing).
Include metal studs, sheathing, air barrier, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity
drainage material, and weep holes in mockup.
Erect mockups facing East toward railroads and in location they are protected during
construction activities..
Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.
Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of
mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities
of workmanship.
a.
b.
Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by Architect in writing.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved
by Architect in writing.
042113 - 2
20-14084.00
1.5
4 MAY 2015
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1.
B.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.
D.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover
securely in place.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than
seven days after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
042113 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A.
2.2
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
BRICK
A.
General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and
color of exposed faces of adjacent units.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate
special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes,
and lintels.
Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result
in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216 or hollow brick complying with
ASTM C 652, Class H40V (void areas between 25 and 40 percent of gross cross-sectional
area).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the available

products that may be incorporated into the Work but are not limited to the following:
a.
B-1 - Cherokee Brick and Tile: Seaside - modular Contact: Pate Rowell: 404925-9247
b.
B-2 Cherokee Brick and Tile: Shellmans Bluff - modular Contact: Pate
Rowell: 404-925-9247
c.
B-3 - Cherokee Brick and Tile: Old Tallahassee - modular Contact: Pate
Rowell: 404-925-9247
d.
B-4 - Cherokee Brick and Tile: Sandhill - modular Contact: Pate Rowell: 404925-9247
Grade: SW.
Type: FBX
Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when
tested per ASTM C 67.
Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall
withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable
difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m).
042113 - 4
20-14084.00
7.
8.
2.3
4 MAY 2015
Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 75/8 inches (194 mm) long.
Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
D.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
E.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a.
b.
c.
F.
Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.

Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime
masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified
requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1.
G.
Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.

Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.
Holcim (US) Inc.;
Lafarge North America Inc.;
Lehigh Cement Company.
National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

a.
Mortar color to match Architects samples submit samples for Architects
approval.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1.
2.
3.
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
042113 - 5
20-14084.00
4.
H.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to

produce required mortar color.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
1.

a.
b.
c.
I.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.

Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
1.

a.
b.
c.
2.4
4 MAY 2015
ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc for Mortar.

BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar
Admixture.
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
Single 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel continuous wire.
2.5
TIES AND ANCHORS

A.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M,
Class 1 coating.
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc
coating.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
B.
Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires
are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.
C.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow
vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.
042113 - 6
20-14084.00
1.
2.
D.
Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hotdip galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls unless
otherwise indicated.
Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of
masonry face, made from 0.25-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel
wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1.
General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood
or metal studs, and as follows:
a.
2.
Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N)

load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in
excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal

anchor section.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
2.6
4 MAY 2015
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division;

Heckmann Building Products Inc.;
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc
Wire-Bond.
Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom,
2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (76 mm) high; with projecting tabs having
slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor
section.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A.
Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,

adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).
a.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal.

Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru-Wall
Flashing.
Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier
Wall Flashing.
Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall
Flashing.
042113 - 7
20-14084.00
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
b.
2.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash.

W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing.
Polyguard Products, Inc.; [Polyguard 300] [Polyguard 400].
Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Sando-Seal.
Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.
Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and
seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a

polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy.
a.

1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
d.
e.
DuPont; Thru-Wall Flashing.

Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Flex-Flash.
Hyload, Inc.; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.
Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch (0.64 mm)
thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of adhesive.
Self-Adhesive Sheet with Drip Edge: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025
inch (0.64 mm) thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of rubberizedasphalt adhesive. Where flashing extends to face of masonry, rubberized-asphalt
coating is held back approximately 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from edge.
1)
2.7
4 MAY 2015
Color: Black.
Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and
seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A.
Compressible Filler:
Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene
urethane or PVC.
B.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
C.
Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1.
Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm)
less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard that must
match the mortar color.
a.

1)
2)
3)
4)
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.

Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.
Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.
042113 - 8
20-14084.00
5)
6)
D.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.

Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.
Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.
1.

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break.

Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.
Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
Provide one of the following configurations:

a.
2.8
4 MAY 2015
Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped
notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use
by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.9
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

EaCo Chem, Inc.
ProSoCo, Inc.
MORTAR MIXES
A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.

Use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N
unless another type is indicated.
042113 - 9
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a.
Face brick.
b.
Cast stone trim units.
Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and
natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1.
2.
Mix to match Architect's sample.

Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following
units:
a.
Face brick.
b.
Cast stone trim units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
B.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
C.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1.
Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
D.
Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
E.
Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30
g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at time of laying.
042113 - 10
20-14084.00
3.3
4 MAY 2015
TOLERANCES
A.
Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1.
2.
3.
B.
Lines and Levels:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6
mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in
3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
Joints:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12
mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.
For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm); do not vary from bed-joint
thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm).
For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
042113 - 11
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
D.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A.
Lay hollow brick as follows:

1.
2.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C.
Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and
similar holes.
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.6
Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A.
Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel
or concrete to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.7
Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry and
structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar
and other rigid materials.
Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36
inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.
ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A.
Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete backup with masonry-veneer anchors to
comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of
type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at
each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.
042113 - 12
20-14084.00
3.
4.
5.
3.8
4 MAY 2015
Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than
2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 32
inches (813 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each[3.5 sq. ft. (0.33 sq.
m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at
intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow
materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition
movement.
B.
Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1.
Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch
(10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
3.9
LINTELS
A.
Install steel lintels where indicated.
B.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.10
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A.
General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf
angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.
B.
Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind
veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked
under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm).
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up
not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
042113 - 13
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows:
1.
3.11
Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements
shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1.
C.
3.12
Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar.
Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 780.
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in "BIA Technical
Notes 20."
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.
042113 - 14
20-14084.00
9.
3.13
4 MAY 2015
Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone

Handbook."
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B.
Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.
Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
042113 - 15
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 04220 - ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Architectural Stone Veneer
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 04220 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.
REFERENCES
C.
ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.
D.
ASTM C 90 - Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
E.
ASTM C 140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units.
F.
ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
G.
ASTM C 270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
H.
ASTM C 426 - Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units.
I.
ASTM C 494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
J.
ASTM C 666 - Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing.
K.
ASTM C 979 - Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
L.
ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
Architectural Stone Veneer : An architectural stone unit manufactured to copy fine grain texture and color
of natural cut stone. Meets ASTM C 90 requirements.
B.
Dry Cast Concrete Products: Manufactured from zero-slump concrete.
C.
Machine Casting Method: Vibratory compaction by machine of earth-moist, zero-slump concrete against
rigid mold until it is densely compacted.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data.
04220
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including profiles, cross sections, modular unit
lengths, reinforcement (if required), exposed faces, anchors and anchoring method recommendations (if
required), and annotation of architectural stone units, types and location.
D.
Samples: Submit pieces of manufacturer's architectural stone units that represent general range of
texture and color proposed to be furnished for project.
E.
Test Results:
1.
Submit manufacturer's test results from architectural stone units previously made by manufacturer
using materials from same sources proposed for use in project.
G.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.
Sufficient plant facilities to provide quality, shapes, quantities, and sizes of architectural stone units
required without delaying progress of the Work.
2.
Minimum of 15 years experience in producing masonry units.
3.
Custom Cast Stone Series and Architectural Masonry Veneer Series are to be manufactured from
a similar mix design to match color and texture.
4.
Manufacturer shall have an internal Quality Assurance Testing Program with certified laboratory
technician(s).
B.
Mock-Ups: Provide full-size architectural stone units for use in construction of mock-ups. Approved
mock-ups shall become the standard for appearance and workmanship for project.
1.
1.7
Mock-ups shall not remain as part of the completed Work. At Architect's direction, demolish mockups and remove debris. See drawings for mock-up requirements
A.
Delivery:
1.
Deliver architectural stone units secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and
discoloration.
2.
Provide itemized shipping list.
3.
Number each piece individually, as required, to match shop drawings and schedules.
B.
Storage:
1.
Store architectural stone units and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
2.
Store architectural stone units on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers.
3.
Do not double stack pallets.
4.
Ventilate units under covers to prevent condensation.
5.
Prevent contact with dirt and splashing.
C.
Handling:
1.
Protect architectural stone units, including corners and edges, during storage, handling, and
installation to prevent chipping, cracking, staining, or other damage.
2.
Handle long units at center and both ends simultaneously to prevent cracking.
3.
Do not use pry bars or other equipment in a manner that could damage units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURER
Basis of Design: Reading Rock, Inc., 4600 Devitt Drive, Cincinnati, Ohio 45246
04220
Phone (800) 482-6466 Fax (513) 874-2361

Web Site www.readingrock.com e-mail info@readingrock.com
2.3
ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER (ARCHITECTURAL MASONRY VENEER SERIES)
A.
Architectural Stone Veneer: RockCasts Architectural Masonry Veneer Series.
B.
Compliance: ASTM C 90.
C.
Casting Method: Machine.
D.
Texture: Slate.
E.
Color: Creme Buff
F.
Units: As indicated on the drawings.
G.
Test Results:
1.
Compressive Strength, ASTM C 140: Typical RockCasts Architectural Masonry Veneer Series
compressive strength range is 3,000 - 5,000 psi at 28 days.
2.
Absorption, ASTM C 140: Typically less than 6 percent at 28 days.
3.
Linear Shrinkage, ASTM C 426: Maximum .065 percent.
4.
Density, ASTM C 140: Typically greater than 120 pounds per cubic foot.
H.
Curing: Cure in enclosed chamber at 95 percent relative humidity and 95 to 120 degrees F for 12 to 18
hours and yard cure for 350 degree-days.
2.4
ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III. White and/or gray as required to match specified color.
B.
Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except for gradation. Granite, quartz, or limestone.
C.
Fine Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except for gradation. Manufactured or natural sands.
D.
Pigments: ASTM C 979, except do not use carbon black pigments. Inorganic iron oxide pigments.
E.
Water Reducing, Retarding, and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494.
F.
Other admixtures: integral water repellents and other chemicals, for which no ASTM Standard exists,
shall be previously established as suitable for use in concrete by proven field performance or through
laboratory testing.
G.
Water: Potable.
2.5
TEXTURE AND COLOR
A.
General: Match texture and color of full-size sample on file with Architect.
B.
Texture of Surfaces Exposed to View:

1.
Fine-grained texture similar to natural stone and architectural stone units.
2.
Approximately equal to approved sample when viewed in direct daylight at 10 feet.
C.
Surface Air Voids:

1.
Size: Maximum 1/32 inch.
2.
Density: Less than 3 occurrences per any 1 square inch.
3.
Viewing Conditions: Not obvious under direct daylight at 10 feet.
04220
D.
Finish:
1.
Minor chipping resulting from shipping and delivery shall not be grounds for rejection of units.
2.
Minor chips shall not be obvious under direct daylight at 20 feet, as determined by Architect.
3.
The occurrence of crazing or efflorescence shall not constitute a cause for rejection.
E.
Color Variation:
1.
Viewing Conditions: Compare in direct daylight at 10 feet, between units of similar age, subjected
to similar weathering conditions.
2.6
MORTAR
A.
Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type N
B.
Mortar Materials: As specified in Section 04200.
2.7
ACCESSORIES
A.
Anchors: Non-corrosive type, sized for conditions. Hot-dip galvanized steel
B.
Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
C.
Cleaner: Prosoco Sure Klean Custom Masonry Cleaner, Prosoco Sure Klean 600 Detergent Prosoco
Sure Klean Vana Trol, Prosoco Light Duty Cleaner * or EaCo Chem NMD-80. If EaCo Chem NMD-80 is
used follow their application process.
* Note: Aggressive cleaners may remove too much of the concrete surface paste making some of the
color to appear to be stripped. Therefore on darker units such as Onyx, Sante Fe and Brownstown a
less aggressive cleaner such as Prosocos Light Duty Cleaner should be used to maintain color.
2.8
A.
2.9
FABRICATION
Shapes: As indicated on drawings.
TOLERANCES
A.
General: Manufacture architectural stone units within tolerances in accordance with ASTM C 90, unless
otherwise specified.
B.
Length, height, width: Do not deviate by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from approved dimensions.
These requirements do not apply to split faced units.
2.10
PRODUCTION QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Mix Designs: Test new and existing mix designs for applicable compressive strength and absorption
compliance before manufacturing architectural stone units.
B.
Plant Production Testing: Tests to be conducted by certified laboratory testing technicians. Test from
specimens selected at random from plant production in accordance with ASTM C 140.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine construction to receive architectural stone units. Notify Architect if construction is not
acceptable. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
04220
B.
3.2
Examine architectural stone units before installation. Do not install unacceptable units.
1.
Waste: For various reasons due to shipping, handling or the manufacturing process, a small
amount of RockCasts Architectural Masonry Veneer Series units may have blemishes or chips and
should be used for field cutting for maximum material utilization. When ordering material, please
allow for waste (approximately 2 to 3%) and saw cutting in your estimate.
2.
All RockCast products are shipped on a pallet and have one unfinished side. Textured units are to
be set with the texture face forward and smooth units are stacked face up on the pallet.
3.
RockCasts Architectural Masonry Veneer Series units have an unfinished back, one finished face,
and approximately 40 to 60% of the units have one smooth finished end. Architectural machine
made split and chiseled faced units can be ordered with a matching finished end upon request.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in conjunction with masonry, as specified in Section 04810.
B.
Pull units from multiple cubes during installation to minimize variation in color and help with natural
blending.
C.
Cut units using motor-driven masonry saws. Finished ends should be turned to the visible side and the
saw cut turned to the inside of the mortar joint to hide exposed aggregates and saw marks.
D.
Do not use pry bars or other equipment in a manner that could damage units.
E.
Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.
F.
Use Type N mortar (ASTM C 270), unless specified otherwise.
G.
Per ACI 530.1, it is not necessary, nor recommended, to wet the units prior to installation.
H.
Set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
I.
Fill vertical joints with mortar.
J.
Make joints 3/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
K.
Tuck point mortar joints to slight concave profile (unless specified otherwise).
L.
Remove excess mortar immediately.
M.
Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
N.
Cover wainscot for protection with plastic, felt paper or other approved products.
O.
Cover freshly installed masonry products as required to assist with the curing process.
P.
Sealant Joints:
1.
As specified in Section 07900.
2.
Prime ends of units, insert properly sized backing rod, and install sealant.
3.
Provide sealant joints at following locations:
a.
Joints at relieving angles.
b.
Control and expansion joints.
c.
As indicated on the drawings.
3.3
A.
TOLERANCES
Installation Tolerances:
04220
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 5 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 5 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch or 1/4 of nominal joint width,
whichever is greater.
Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces: Do not exceed 1/8-inch difference between planes
of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed units after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
B.
Perform test of cleaner on small area of 4 x 4 on each type and color and receive approval by Architect
before full cleaning. Let test area dry 4 to 5 days before inspection. Keep test area for future
comparison.
C.
Clean units by wetting down the surface first, before using the specified cleaner (as specified in Section
2.7.C). Brush on cleaner, let dwell for 2 to 3 minutes. Reapply cleaner, scrub surface with masonry
brush and rinse off thoroughly. Areas with heavy soiling use a wood block or non-metallic scraper.
D.
Apply cleaner to units in accordance with cleaner manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Do not use the following to clean units:

1.
Muriatic acid.
2.
Power washing.
3.
Sandblasting.
4.
Harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage or discolor surfaces.
3.5
REPAIR
A.
Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet.
B.
Repair with touchup materials provided by manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Repair methods and results to be approved by Architect.
3.6
A.
3.8
A.
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

Inspect completed installation in accordance with ACI 530 requirements.
PROTECTION
Protect installed units from splashing, stains, mortar, and other damage.
END OF SECTION
04220
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 047000 - MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Manufactured stone veneer masonry, accessories, and related materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
For manufactured stone veneer units, include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
2.
Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions and recommendations.
B.
Samples for Verification:

1.
For each color and texture of manufactured stone veneer required, 10 inches by 16
inches in size.
2.
For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be
used on Project. Label Samples to indicated types and amounts of pigments used.
F.
Field Mock-up Panel : For each color, texture and shape of manufactured stone
veneer unit required see drawings for layout. .Make available for Architect's review at
Project site
1.
Make Samples from materials to be used for units used on Project.
G.
Material Test Reports:

1.
Provide ICC (International Code Council) ES Report No. 3246.
2.
Provide ICC Acceptance Criteria for Precast Stone Veneer (ICC-ES AC51) Test
Reports for physical properties.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer
Qualifications:
Audited
by
third
party
IAS
inspection
agency
www.iasonline.org/pdf/aa/aa-727.pdf and the International Code Council (ICC)
www.iccsafe.org.
B.
Source Limitations for Manufactured Stone Veneer: Obtain manufactured stone veneer units
through single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Source Limitations for Raw Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality, including color,
from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for
each raw material.
D.
Certification: Manufacturers ICC-ES evaluation report certifying that a qualifying inspection of

the facilities manufacturing process has been successfully completed and manufacturer is in
047000 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
compliance with ICC operational standards and Acceptance Criteria for Precast Stone Veneer
(AC 51).
1.
Density: ASTM C 567, Standard Test Method for Density of Structural Lightweight
Concrete.
2.
Freeze/Thaw: ASTM C 67, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile.
3.
Compressive Strength: ASTM C 39, Standard Test Method Compressive Strength
in Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
4.
Flexural Strength: ASTM C 348,
Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of
Hydraulic-Cement Mortars.
5.
Tensile Strength: ASTM C 190-85, Method of Test for Tensile Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars.
6.
Absorption: ICC-ES AC 51 Section 4.6, Acceptance Criteria for Precast Stone Veneer.
7.
Thermal Properties: ASTM C518, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
1.4
A.
Coordinate delivery of manufactured stone veneer to avoid delaying the Work and to minimize
the need for on-site storage.
B.
Pack, handle, and ship manufactured stone veneer units in suitable handi-packs or crates on
40 by 48 inch wooden pallets.
1.
Pack units so that faces do not rub against other units.
2.
When using flatbed delivery equipment, use brick boards to securely strap the load to
prevent damage to the units.
3.
Keep units ventilated under covers to prevent condensation.
C.
Store cementitious materials and metal lath on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D.
Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of

installation at minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and for 48 hours following installation.
B.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Do not use units containing visible frozen moisture.
Do not use calcium chloride or anti-freeze admixtures.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: If temperature exceeds 90 degrees F, additional water may be

needed on the scratch-coated surface and the backs of the manufactured stone veneer units
being applied. Providing shade and/or frequent misting of the wall may be required. Consult
with mortar manufacturer to determine if mortar mix hot weather mix options are available.
Local building code hot weather methods should be followed.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Limited Warranty on Materials: 50 year material-only on veneer installed in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
047000 - 2
20-14084.00
1.
1.7
4 MAY 2015
Provide new materials in lieu of defective materials.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide extra units in shapes, colors and sizes employed.

1.
Provide 5 percent of the coverage area for corners and flats.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design: Native Custom Stone, 236 Hightower Parkway, Dawsonville, GA 30534
Phone: (706)-216-5545 , Fax:(706) 216-5550 ,Email: bbennett@nativecstone.com, Website:
http://www.nativecustomstone.com/ .
1. Approved Equals accepted
2.2
F.
2.3
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER:

Rubble Stone Profiles (with matching corner pieces): Suede
MANUFACTURED STONE ACCESSORIES
K.
1.
2.
Window Sill/ Water Table:

Color: Suede.
Size: As shown on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Prevent work from occurring on the opposite side of walls to which veneer is applied during and
for 48 hours following installation
Preparation: Follow manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for type of
substrate. www.nativecustomstone/specs/stone-i nstallation-and-accessory-details
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
Install manufactured stone veneer in accordance with manufacturers Installation Guidelines for
Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer.
047000 - 3
20-14084.00
B.
C.
4 MAY 2015
Install metal lath and scratch-coat of mortar in accordance with manufacturers Installation
Guidelines for Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer.
Install manufactured stone veneer as indicated on Drawings.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's Installation Guidelines for Adhered
Concrete Masonry Veneer.
2.
Coordinate installation of manufactured stone veneer with installation of flashing
specified in other Sections.
1.
D.
Before tooling the mortar grout, allow mortar to become thumb-print hard.
E.
Brush joints within 2 hours.
3.4
A.
3.5
CLEANING
Clean manufactured stone veneer in accordance with manufactures recommendations.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished work from rain during and for 48 hours following installation.
B.
Protect finished work from damage during remainder of construction period.

047000 - 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2.
Wood blocking and nailers.
3.
Wood furring and grounds.
4.
Plywood backing panels.
B.
1.
Section 061600 "Sheathing."
2.
Section 313116 "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood framing.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
C.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.

NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 1
20-14084.00
3.
4.
5.
1.5
4 MAY 2015
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.

A.
Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness
or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1.
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a

qualified independent testing agency.
2.2
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
2.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1.
D.
Application: Treat all items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1.
2.
3.
2.3
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
Wood furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete
walls.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at
any time during the test.
1.
2.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 3
20-14084.00
3.
4.
C.
4 MAY 2015
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
Design Value Adjustment Factors:
Treated lumber shall be tested according
ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6841.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.
1.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
testing agency.
D.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
E.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Framing for raised platforms.

Concealed blocking.
Roof construction.
Plywood backing panels.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 and any of the following
species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Cants.
Furring.
Grounds.
Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
Northern species; NLGA.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1.
2.
3.
Mixed southern pine; No. 3 grade; SPIB.

Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA,
NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 4
20-14084.00
4.
5.
4 MAY 2015
Northern species; No. 3 Common grade; NLGA.

Western woods; Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
D.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
E.
For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A.
2.6
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in

thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.7
Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry:

Formulation complying with
ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of [70] <Insert value> g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 5
20-14084.00
B.
4 MAY 2015
Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking
of testing agency exposed to view.
C.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1.
Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
D.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
E.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1.
Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
F.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
G.
Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
H.
For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
1.
Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with
wood filler.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 6
20-14084.00
3.2
4 MAY 2015
WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A.
Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
C.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not

less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A.
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B.
Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm

actual-) size furring vertically at [24 inches (610 mm)] [600 mm] o.c.
C.
Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size
furring vertically at [16 inches (406 mm)] [400 mm] o.c.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B.
Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Wall sheathing.
Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials.
2.
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.
3.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.

A.
Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide

materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
SHEATHING
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory.".
061600 - 1
20-14084.00
2.2
4 MAY 2015
WALL SHEATHING
A.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
2.3
CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.

G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold.
National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP.
Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass
United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.
Type and Thickness: Regular, Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.
Size: 48 by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm) for vertical installation.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1.
B.
2.4
For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A.
Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing:

Silicone emulsion sealant complying with
ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and
sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed
fasteners.
1.
Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by
10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended
by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints
in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces
do not span between fewer than three support members.
B.
Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1.
SHEATHING
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
061600 - 2
20-14084.00
2.
4 MAY 2015
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D.
Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these
materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed assembly.
E.
Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
F.
Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so

sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
SHEATHING
061600 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:

1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:

1.
1.3
Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
Division 7 Section Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing for waterproofing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
B.
Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from
a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary
materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces.

Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
071113 - 1
20-14084.00
B.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
ChemMasters Corp.
Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.
Gardner Gibson, Inc.
Henry Company.
Karnak Corporation.
Koppers Inc.
Malarkey Roofing Products.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.
Tamms Industries, Inc.
C.
Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
D.
Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
E.
Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
F.
VOC Content: Zero or less.
2.2
4 MAY 2015
A.
Cut-Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B.
Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
D.
Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended by

dampproofing manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
3.2
Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.
PREPARATION
A.
Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being
stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering
and clogging weep holes and drains.
071113 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and
apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
C.
Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.
3.3
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of
exterior masonry cavity walls and metal stud walls with exterior fiberglass faced sheathing.
1.
2.
3.4
Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverages

indicated.
Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure six hours before applying subsequent coats.
Allow 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling.
Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer
ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe.
Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that
interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto shelf angles
supporting veneer.
COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A.
On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and brush or spray coat to achieve
a "pin-hole free" application, to render 15-20 mils dry film thickness. Apply on sheathing with
no sheathing color or lettering reflecting through.

3.5
CLEANING
A.
Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
071113 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
B.

1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in masonry cells.
Division 7 Section Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems--Class PB for insulation
specified as part of these systems.
Division 7 Section Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing for insulation specified as part of
roofing construction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Insulation under slabs-on-grade.

Concealed building insulation.
Cavity wall insulation.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 1
20-14084.00
A.
4 MAY 2015
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Company.
Owens Corning.
Tenneco Building Products.
Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
CertainTeed Corporation.
Johns Manville Corporation.
Owens Corning.
Foil faced polyisocyanurate board insulation

Dow Chemical Company
4.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:

a.
2.2
Dow Chemical Company
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1.
B.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively. Provide a
minimum R-value of 5
1.
C.
Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's

standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), unless otherwise indicated. Basis of design is LTTR
of 5 per inch. Min. 2 for LTTR of 10.
Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation:

ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective
membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face; consisting of fibers manufactured from

glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
D.
Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate, Board Cavity Wall Insulation: Glass-fiber-reinforced enhanced

polyisocyanurate foam core sheathing faced with nominal 4 mil embossed blue acrylic-coated
aluminum on one side and 1.25 mil embossed aluminum on the other side, complying with ASTM
C 1289, Type I, Class 2. Provide 48 wide sheets without horizontal joints. Minimum LTTR
Valuee of 5.7 per one inch.
1.
Accessories
a.
Fasteners: Provide insulated sheathing manufacturers recommended polymer or
other corrosion protective coated steel screw fasteners for anchoring sheathing to
metal wall framing. Fastener length and size based on wall sheathing thickness.
b.
Insulation Flashing Tape: Provide insulation manufacturers recommended board
joint tape for sealing joints, seams and veneer tie penetrations through the
insulation layer.
c.
Penetration Filler: Provide insulated sheathing manufacturers recommended
polyurethane foam for sealing penetrations of insulated sheathing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing

projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
B.
Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent escape of

insulation. Provide bronze or stainless-steel screens (inside) where openings must be
maintained for drainage or ventilation.
3.3
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
D.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls,

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E.
Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION

A.
On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
1.
3.5
If not indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade
line.
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
C.
Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.6
Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to
flanges of metal studs.
INSTALLATION OF CAVITY WALL INSULATION

A.
Install rigid, heavyweight aluminum-foil faced, units to exterior wall with screws with plastic caps
long enough to penetrate the framing a minimum of .45 inch (11.4 mm).
B.
The surface of insulation at all horizontal and vertical seams and joints must be sealed and
covered with a minimum 2 7/8 inch (73 mm), aluminum foil faced, vapor retarder tape
recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Seal all penetrations in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
3.7
A.
EXPOSED BUILDING INSULATION

Install rigid, heavyweight aluminum-foil faced, units to exterior wall with adhesive in accordance
with manufacturers written instructions. Install J trim at bottom of panel and T batten/receiver
trim at all vertical joints.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 4
20-14084.00
B.
3.8
A.
4 MAY 2015
Install insulation board vertically with one-piece full height. Channel backside of insulation to
receive surface mounted conduit, piping, etc.
PROTECTION
Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 072413 - POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over gypsum sheathing.
Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for sheathing.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
Class PB EIFS: A non-load-bearing, exterior wall cladding system that consists of an insulation
board attached adhesively, mechanically, or both to the substrate; an integrally reinforced base
coat; and a textured protective finish coat.
A.
EIFS Performance: Comply with the following:

1.
2.
B.
Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and
supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other
in-service conditions.
Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into EIFS and assemblies
behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermalinsulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including
substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.
Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that
comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS mounted on

1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing
no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts (500 L) of
sand when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A.
Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss
after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.
Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking,
checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072413 - 1
20-14084.00
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
characteristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000
hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 154.
Freeze-Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting,
blistering, peeling, or delamination, or indications of delamination between components
when viewed under 5 times magnification after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.
Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch (50.8-by-50.8-mm)
clean glass substrate, cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per
ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.
Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC-ES AC219.
Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested
per EIMA 101.03.
Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS mounted on 1/2inch- (12.7-mm-)thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water
penetration into the plane of the base coat to expanded-polystyrene board interface of
the test specimen after 15 minutes at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa) of air pressure difference or
20 percent of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater, across the specimen
during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02.
Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS
mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no
cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after
testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247.
Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: Resist wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219.
Impact Resistance:
Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS when
constructed, conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the
following:
a.
12.
1.5
4 MAY 2015
Standard Impact Resistance: 25 to 49 inch-lb (2.8 to 5.6 J).
Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICCES AC219 when tested per ASTM E 330.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of
penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and
anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other
work.
C.
Samples for Verification: 8-inch- (600-mm-) square panels for each type of finish-coat color and
texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work.
1.
Include sealants and exposed accessory samples to verify color selected.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
E.
Manufacturer Certificates:
requirements.
F.
Material or Product Certificates: For cementitious materials and aggregates and for each
insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer.
Signed by manufacturers certifying that EIFS comply with
072413 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
G.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each insulation, reinforcing mesh, and coating.
H.
Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified

to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.
1.
Fabricator/Erector Qualifications: Certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to

fabricate and erect manufacturer's prefabricated panel system using skilled and trained
workers.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from
sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following
fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system
components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.
Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268.
2.
Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259.
3.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and
finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or
less, per ASTM E 84.
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set
quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.7

A.
Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly
identifying products.
B.
Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic,
and other causes.
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.

Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating
materials to Project site before installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for a
minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply
EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and
072413 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures
permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and
warranty requirements.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall
assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are
protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other
causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

.
1.
Dryvit Systems, Inc.
2.
Finestone; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
3.
Senergy; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
4.
SonoWall; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
5.
Sto Corp.
MATERIALS
A.
Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and
finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with
substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.
B.
Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates

from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and
adhesive used for application of insulation.
C.
Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use
as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and
performance criteria of ICC-ES AC209.
1.
2.
Sheathing Joint Compound and Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for
sealing joints between and penetrations through sheathing.
VOC Content of Coatings Used as Insulation Adhesive: 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D.
Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt

and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or
product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.
E.
Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use;
compatible with substrate and complying with one of the following:
072413 - 4
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
F.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
4.
Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m).
Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m).
Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m).
Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. (244 g/sq. m).
EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the
Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or
natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use
with portland cement.
Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and
manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.
Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert
fillers to which only water is added at Project site.
Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and inert fillers
that is ready to use without adding other materials.
Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials:

formulation complying with one of the following:
1.
2.
J.
Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less
than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.
Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm)
and in thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) thick or less than
thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.
Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.
Base-Coat Materials:
following:
1.
I.
Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, and
polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat.
Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers
specified for base coat.
Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of
insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for

compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained
mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. (21 dN/cm) per ASTM E 2098; complying with
ASTM D 578 and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
4 MAY 2015
Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS
manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded
Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for material performance
and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following:
1.
G.
EIFS manufacturer's standard waterproof
Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or
natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use
with portland cement.
Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and
manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.
Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing

base-coat surface for application of finish coat.
072413 - 5
20-14084.00
K.
4 MAY 2015
Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating complying with the
following:
1.
Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound

stone particles, and fillers.
a.
2.
L.
Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting

of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated below; selected
for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application
indicated; capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board; and of the
following description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
M.
For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) in thickness,
provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954.
For attachment to light-gage steel framing members not less than 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)
in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002.
For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide sheathing dowel in form of a
plastic wing-tipped fastener with thermal cap, sized to fit insulation thickness indicated
and to penetrate substrate to depth required to secure anchorage.
For attachment, provide manufacturer's standard fasteners suitable for substrate.
Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply
with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from zinc alloy; and complying with
ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Aggregate: Marble chips of size and color as indicated by manufacturer's

designations.
Colors: E-1 to match Synergy Frappe
E-2 to match Synergy Finesse
E-3 to match Synergy Parchment
E-4 to match Synergy Clay
E-5 to match Synergy Rawhide
Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth
required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to
coating and back leg.
Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with
face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and
insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.
Window Sill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing
beneath windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to exterior.
MIXING
A.
General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.
Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS
manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by
EIFS manufacturer or discard.
072413 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS.
B.
Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other
construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.
C.
1.
2.
3.2
Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.

Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS.
Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish
coats on other work.
B.
Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during
installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind EIFS and deterioration of substrates.
C.
Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain
optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
3.3
EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.
3.4
Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS
as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION

A.
Primer/Sealer: Apply over gypsum sheathing substrates to protect substrates from degradation
and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate.
B.
Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to
provide water-/weather-resistive barrier.
1.
Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of
sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
ExtendtheEIFSbackupcoatingoutpastEIFSedges6".
C.
Waterproof Adhesive/Base Coat:

degradation.
Apply over sloped surfaces to protect substrates from
D.
Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed
water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation.
Prime
072413 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions and details.
3.5
TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints,at window sills, and
elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with
installation of insulation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Drip Screed/Track: Use at bottom edges of EIFS unless otherwise indicated.

Window Sill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated.
Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.
Casing Bead: Use at other locations.
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Board Insulation: Mechanically or adhesivally attach insulation to substrate in compliance with

ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's written instructions, and the following:
1.
Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions. Install top surface of fastener heads flush with plane
of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with the following minimum
penetration:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented
horizontally.
Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter
casing beads toward interior of panels if possible.
Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running
bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm)
wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from
corners of window and door openings[ and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from
aesthetic reveals.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
Steel Framing: 5/16 inch (8 mm).

Concrete and Masonry: 1 inch (25 mm).
Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (150 mm)
from horizontal and 4 inches (100 mm) from vertical joints in sheathing. Apply
adhesive in a vertical orientation to allow drainage.
Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints in
sheathing.
Interlock ends at internal and external corners.

Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,
continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps
greater than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert
insulation without using adhesive or other material.
Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges
and shapes complying with details indicated.
072413 - 8
20-14084.00
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more
than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to
sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit
configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and
locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than
3/4 inch (19 mm).
Install foam shapes and attach to sheathing.
Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.
Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within EIFS
and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between
casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width
indicated.
After installing insulation and before applying reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges
with strip reinforcing mesh. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not
less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:
a.
b.
c.
15.
B.
Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat,
reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.
Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between
EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.
At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish
coat over face leg of accessories.
Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not
allow water to penetrate behind flashing and EIFS protective-coating lamina.
Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.7
4 MAY 2015
At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.

Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other
EIFS.
At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction.
Where wall height or building shape changes.
Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.
BASE-COAT INSTALLATION
A.
Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapes in minimum thickness
recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) dry-coat
thickness.
B.
Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free
installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm)
or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches (204 mm) of corners. Completely
embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and
pattern are not visible.
1.
Standard-impact reinforcing mesh unless otherwise indicated.
072413 - 9
20-14084.00
C.
4 MAY 2015
Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches
(100 mm) beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch (230-by-300-mm) strip reinforcing
mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip
reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not
less than 4 inches (100 mm) on each side of corners.
1.
2.
At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches (200 mm) wide.
Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.
D.
Foam Shapes: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat.
E.
Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and
thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat
has cured.
3.8
FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION
A.
Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform
appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color
and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture
variations.
1.
C.
3.9
Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS
manufacturer.

A.
Special Inspections:
inspections:
1.
Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
According to ICC-ES AC24.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C.
EIFS Tests and Inspections: For the following:

1.
According to ICC-ES AC24.
D.
Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified
requirements.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials
from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS
coatings.
072413 - 10
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
072413 - 11
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Adhered TPO membrane roofing system.

Roof insulation.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings, and counterflashings.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.
DEFINITIONS
A.
TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.
B.
Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4
A.
General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane
roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7-98.
1.
2.
3.
Corner Uplift Pressure: 60 lbf/sq. ft.

Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 60 lbf/sq. ft.
Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 60 lbf/sq. ft.
075423 - 1
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials
that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings.
1.
2.
1.5
Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.

Hail Resistance: MH
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system.

attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
Base flashings and membrane terminations.

Tapered insulation, including slopes.
Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing and
fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing.
Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
D.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1.
Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.
F.
Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
G.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing

system identical to that used for this Project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for membrane
roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane
roofing manufacturer.
D.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated,
as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
E.
Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
075423 - 2
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.7
4 MAY 2015
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers
of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

A.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1.
Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D.
Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in

which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
075423 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING

A.
Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet:

reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.
1.

the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
2.2
ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

Firestone Building Products Company.
GAF Materials Corporation.
GenFlex Roofing Systems.
Johns Manville.
Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics.
Versico Incorporated.
Thickness: 45 mils, nominal.

Exposed Face Color: White.
AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A.
General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer

for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
1.
2.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.

Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B.
Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing,

55 mils (1.4 mm) thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.
D.
Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
E.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
075423 - 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
F.
Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,

approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick), prepunched.
G.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate,
and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
H.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants,
termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.3
ROOF INSULATION
A.
General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane

roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated.
B.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces. Minimum R-value to be R - 22
C.
Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per
12 inches (1:48)] unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.4
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for

intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.
B.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C.
Modified Asphaltic Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended modified

asphalt, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or
to another insulation layer.
D.
Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-applied, lowrise, one- or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate
or to another insulation layer.
E.
Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended sprayapplied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to
substrate or to another insulation layer.
2.5
WALKWAYS
A.
Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured

walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane
roofing system manufacturer.
075423 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and
that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck."
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B.
Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
C.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D.
Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation
thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in
each direction.
1.
E.
Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install
noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and
install composite board insulation for top layer.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
075423 - 6
20-14084.00
F.
Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
1.
2.
3.4
4 MAY 2015
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4
inch (6 mm) with insulation.
1.
G.
Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified

Windstorm Resistance Classification.
Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A.
Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's

technical personnel.
C.
Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by
manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to
splice area of membrane roofing.
E.
In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations,

penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
F.
Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
G.
Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of
membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure a watertight seam installation.
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.5
Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet membrane.
Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in
place with clamping ring.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
075423 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D.
Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
3.6
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A.
3.7
Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.

A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion.
C.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D.
Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.8
PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A.
Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.9
ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY (To Be Provided By Installer)

A.
WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has
performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Owner: <Insert name of Owner>.

Address: <Insert address>.
Building Name/Type: <Insert information>.
Address: <Insert address>.
Area of Work: <Insert information>.
Acceptance Date: <Insert date>.
075423 - 8
20-14084.00
7.
8.
4 MAY 2015
Warranty Period: <Insert time>.

Expiration Date: <Insert date>.
B.
AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C.
NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and
defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D.
This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1.
Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lightning;
Peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert wind speed> mph (m/sec);
Fire;
Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
faults or defects of work.
During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing
Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations,
attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become
null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work
covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations,
Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said
work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said
alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a
limitation or termination of this Warranty.
During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and
shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully
available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not
operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
075423 - 9
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract

was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E.
IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of
<Insert month>, <Insert year>.
1.
2.
3.
Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>.

Name: <Insert name>.
Title: <Insert title>.
075423 - 10
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Preformed corrugated decking.
2. Fasteners.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
3. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants
1.2
REFERENCES
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. M A653: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- iron Alloy Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process
2. ASTM B209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
3. ASTM D1922: Specification for Non-Asphalt, fiberglass-based underlayment used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
4. ASTM D1970: Self-adhering rubberized sheet membrane.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA)
1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for the roofing specified.
2. Shop Drawings: Indicate thickness and dimension of parts, flashing and anchoring methods,
and detail and location of joints; including joints necessary to accommodate thermal
movement.
3. Samples
b. 4 samples of each finish in color or colors selected, 3 inch by 5 inch minimum.
4. Affidavit certifying that the material meets the requirements specified.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience in manufacturing roofing panels
similar to those specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to roofing manufacturer.
1.5

A. Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original crating, properly labeled for
identification and installation purposes. Store materials in accordance with panel manufacturers
recommendations. Handle materials carefully to avoid damage to panels and finishes.
1.6
WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warrant the materials to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the
General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by paint manufacturer's standard
multi-year warranty. The warranty shall be in writing and shall be signed by the manufacturer.
SHEET METAL ROOFING
07610
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Firestone Metal Products
B. Approved equal will be accepted
2.2
ROOFING TYPE
A. UNA-CLAD UC-601 C-Deck, formed aluminum or steel corrugated roofing panels.
2.3
PANEL MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Aluminum Panels: ASTM B209, Aluminum Association specification sheet 3003-H14/3105-H14
for painted finish.
1. Thickness: 0.040 inch.
B. Steel Panels: ASTM A653, G90 (lock-forming quality), extra smooth, galvanized steel, minimum
spangle.
1. Thickness: 24 gauge.
C. Form roofing panels in longest practical lengths, true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free
from distribution or manufacturing defects.
1. Panel Width: 40 inches.
2. Panel Length: 600 inches
3. Panel Depth: 0.5 inch.
4. Corrugation Ribs: 2 inches on center (nominal).
2.5
FINISHES
A. Coil-Coated or Spray-Applied Fluorocarbon Resin
1. Color: Selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturers standard colors.
3. Number of Coats: [2-coat.
3. Provide factory applied strippable plastic film for protection during fabrication and installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed and notify the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, free of ice and snow, and
free from defects.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Obtain field measurements prior to completion of manufacturing and finishing. When field
measurements are not possible, provide method of installation which will allow minor adjustment
in the field.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing system plumb, level and true, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, final
shop drawings, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal manual and standard practices.
SHEET METAL ROOFING
07610
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B. Completed system shall be free from over-bending, deforming, stretching, distortion, waves, and
buckles.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair panels with minor damage.
B. Remove panels damaged beyond repair and replace with new panels to match adjacent
undamaged panels.
C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with recommendations of
panel and coating manufacturers.
D. Remove protective film immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL ROOFING
07610
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Manufactured Products:
a.
b.
B.
1.3
Manufactured through-wall flashing and counterflashing.

Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2.
Division 7 Section " Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing " for installing sheet metal
flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing.
3.
Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof
hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B.
Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces
according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49:
1.
Wind Zone 1: For velocity pressures of 21 to 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1.00 to 1.44 kPa): 60-lbf/sq.
ft. (2.87-kPa) perimeter uplift force, 90-lbf/sq. ft. (4.31-kPa) corner uplift force, and 30lbf/sq. ft. (1.44-kPa) outward force.
C.
Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements
from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1.
1.4
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.
076200 - 1
20-14084.00
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of
expansion and contraction.
Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
Details of special conditions.
Details of connections to adjoining work.
Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches (1:5).
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1.
2.
Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished
seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other
attachments.
Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and
other exposed accessories.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
E.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5
4 MAY 2015
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,
including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between
shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:
1.
C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
1.6

A.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B.
Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight
and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim
installation.
076200 - 2
20-14084.00
1.7
4 MAY 2015
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METALS
A.
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish
required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.
1.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:

a.
2.
3.
2.2
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.
B.
Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
C.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick,

consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBSmodified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C).
Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29
deg C).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
076200 - 3
20-14084.00
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
2.3
4 MAY 2015
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT.

Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra.
Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.
Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.
Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal
1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a.
2.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using factory-applied

coating.
b.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
C.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
D.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
E.
Epoxy Seam Sealer:

Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
F.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.4
MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A.
Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with
interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1.

the following:
a.
Cheney Flashing Company.
076200 - 4
20-14084.00
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
b.
2.5
Fry Reglet Corporation.

Heckmann Building Products Inc.
Hickman, W. P. Company.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.
Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.
Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick.

Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top
edge.
Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
Accessories:
a.
6.
4 MAY 2015
Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure

flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
Finish: Mill.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
metal.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
B.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and
within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
D.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl
sealant concealed within joints.
E.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
076200 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
F.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
G.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal
with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
H.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.6
ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A.
Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections.
Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of
size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate
expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
1.
2.
3.
Gutter Style: As shown on Drawings

Expansion Joints: Butt type with cover plate.
Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches (380 mm): Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
4.
Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches (410 to 510 mm):

materials:
a.
Fabricate from the following
5.

materials:
a.
6.

materials:
a.
B.
Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with
metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
C.
Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of
dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim, and built-in
overflows. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
D.
Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
2.7
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A.
Roof-Edge Flashing: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates.
1.
Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide, concealed backup plate and 6-inch(150-mm-) wide, exposed cover plates.
076200 - 6
20-14084.00
2.
B.
4 MAY 2015

a.
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-)
long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous
cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg.
Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight.
1.
2.
3.
Coping Profile: As indicated on the Drawings.

Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide, concealed backup plate.
a.
C.
Roof and Roof to Wall Transition, Roof to Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap
Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
D.
Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
E.
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
F.
Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
G.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
H.
Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A.
Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
B.
Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
076200 - 7
20-14084.00
C.
3.2
4 MAY 2015
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.
B.
Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed
water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
3.3
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
Install sealant tape where indicated.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1.
2.
Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim
with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or
cementitious construction.
Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of polyethylene sheet.
C.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600
mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E.
Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1.
Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
076200 - 8
20-14084.00
2.
F.
3.4
4 MAY 2015
ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and

21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type
joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible,
set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be
permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated.
1.
2.
Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at
24-inch (600-mm) centers.
Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 24-inch (600-mm)
centers.
C.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base
flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
D.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.

Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of
4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in
installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant.
E.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation

of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to
pipes that penetrate roof.
3.5
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.
General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B.
Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section

"Unit Masonry Assemblies."
C.
Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."
076200 - 9
20-14084.00
3.6
4 MAY 2015
MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.
3.7
Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with

installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
3.8
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch
(3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
E.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
076200 - 10
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Roof hatches.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and
stairs for access to roof hatches.
A.
1.4
General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data:

maintenance manuals.
C.
Warranty: Sample of warranty.
1.5
For roof accessories to include in operation and
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
B.
Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be

supported.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ROOF HATCH
A.
Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated single-walled curbs, welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and
weathertight perimeter gasketing, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter
bottom.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, product by one of the
following:
a.
Bilco Company (The).
b.
J. L. Industries, Inc.
c.
Metallic Products Corp.
d.
Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches (750 by 900 mm).
C.
Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa) internal
uplift load.
D.
Hatch Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.01 mm) thick.
1.
E.
Finish: Factory prime coating.
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.

Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal
liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.
Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and
padlock hasps inside and outside.
G.
Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation;
attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Height: 42 inches (1060 mm) above finished roof deck.

Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches (31 mm) in diameter or galvanizedsteel tube, 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) in diameter.
Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches (50 mm) high by 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick.
Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inches
(533 mm)in diameter.
Chain Passway Barrier: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end.
Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated
end fittings.
Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of
handrail and railing members.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 2
20-14084.00
a.
H.
4 MAY 2015
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access

ladder.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to
closed position.
Height: 42 inches (1060 mm) above finished roof deck.
Material: Steel tube.
Post: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter pipe.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
C.
Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs
in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated
loads.
Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C.
Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D.
Roof-Hatch Installation:
1.
Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 3
20-14084.00
2.
E.
3.3
Verify that roof hatch operates properly.

mechanism and hardware.
4 MAY 2015
Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating
Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
REPAIR AND CLEANING

A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B.
Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to
Division 9 painting Sections.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Clean off excess sealants.
E.
Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Urethane joint sealants.
2.
Latex joint sealants.
3.
Preformed joint sealants.
4.
Acoustical joint sealants.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.
Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated
construction.
Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with
acoustical sealant.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.
D.
Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated
to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified
in this Section.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer.
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
20-14084.00
4.
4 MAY 2015
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from
joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications
for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that
will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
C.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use NT.
1.
B.

a.
Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 900.
b.
Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
c.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 1000.
d.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.
e.
Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
1.

a.
b.
c.
C.
BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.

Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.
Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
20-14084.00
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.3
4 MAY 2015
BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1.

Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201.
Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A.
Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.

Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.

a.
b.
2.5
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply
with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous
joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Concrete.
Masonry.
Exterior insulation and finish systems.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
Metal.
Glass.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
20-14084.00
3.3
4 MAY 2015
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth,
uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
G.
3.4
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written
recommendations.
CLEANING
A.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products
in which joints occur.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
20-14084.00
3.5
4 MAY 2015
PROTECTION
A.
3.6
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1.
2.
3.
B.
Joint Locations:
a.
Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b.
Joints between plant-precast concrete deck structure.
c.
Joints between different materials listed above.
d.
Other joints as indicated.
Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade or Single component,
pourable, traffic grade.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
C.
D.
Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

Joints between plant-precast concrete deck structure.
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.
Joints between metal panels.
Joints between different materials listed above.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, storefront and
curtainwall.
h.
Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
i.
Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 25 at all other joints specified
above.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1.
Joint Locations:
2.
3.
a.
Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b.
Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
JOINT SEALANTS
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
079200 - 6
20-14084.00
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
E.
4 MAY 2015
Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls.

Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows
and elevator entrances.
Joint Sealant: Acrylic based.

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
1.
Joint Location:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Acoustical joints where indicated.

Joint Sealant: Acoustical.

Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for embedding anchors for hollow metal
work into masonry construction.
Division 8 Section Door Hardware for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
Division 9 Sections Exterior Painting and Interior Painting for field painting hollow metal
doors and frames.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B.
Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Elevations of each door design.

Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Other Action Submittals:
081113 - 1
20-14084.00
1.
D.
1.5
4 MAY 2015
Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision
of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on
Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 UBC Standard 7-2 or UL 10B.
1.6

A.
Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood
blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1.
1.7
Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air
circulation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements:
fabrication.
Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following, but are not limited to, the following:
081113 - 2
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
4 MAY 2015
Amweld Building Products, LLC.

Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Firedoor Corporation.
Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 (ZF120) metallic coating.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation;
mill phosphatized.
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m)
density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
H.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
I.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A.
General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.
2.
Design: As indicated on Drawings.

Core Construction:
Manufacturer's
polyisocyanurate core.
standard
polystyrene,
polyurethane
or
081113 - 3
20-14084.00
a.
Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors:

Provide doors fabricated with thermalresistance value (R-value) of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (1.057 K x
sq. m/W when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
1)
3.
4.
5.
4 MAY 2015
Locations: Exterior doors.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge.

a.
Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
B.
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and
model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from
same material as door face sheets.
D.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.4
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B.
Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is
indicated.
1.
Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates

from same material as frames.
2.5
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
2.6
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
inch (4.5 mm) thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
081113 - 4
20-14084.00
2.7
4 MAY 2015
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C.
Hollow Metal Doors:

1.
D.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
E.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door
Hardware."
1.
2.
3.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
081113 - 5
20-14084.00
2.8
4 MAY 2015
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.3
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular
line from head to floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
081113 - 6
20-14084.00
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
b.
c.
d.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a.
b.
2.
3.4
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.

Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
C.
4 MAY 2015
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
081113 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Hollow-core doors with hardboard or MDF faces.
2.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Dimensions and locations of blocking.

Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Undercuts.

A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder
of construction period.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 1
20-14084.00
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a.
b.
2.
3.
4 MAY 2015
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067by-2134-mm) section.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
(0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior Doors: One year(s) from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

Ampco.
Eggers Industries.
Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Marlite.
Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company.
Oshkosh Door Company.
VT Industries, Inc.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's
"Architectural Woodwork Standards."
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do
not contain urea formaldehyde.
C.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Standard Duty.
D.
Hollow-Core Doors:
1.
2.
Construction: Standard hollow core.

Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
5-by-18-inch (125-by-460-mm) lock blocks at both stiles.

5-inch (125-mm) top and bottom rail blocking.
2-1/2-inch (64-mm) midrail blocking.
DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A.
Interior Hollow-Core Doors :
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 2
20-14084.00
1.
2.
Grade: Premium.
Faces: Hardboard or MDF.
a.
b.
3.
4.
2.4
4 MAY 2015
Hardboard Faces: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard).

MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or Grade 160.
Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.

WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Standard Duty.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair
or refinishing.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Exterior storefront framing.

Storefront framing for punched openings.
Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for curtain-wall systems that
mechanically retain glazing on four sides.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
A.
General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1.
2.
3.
Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
Failure includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Deflection exceeding specified limits.

Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Sealant failure.
Failure of operating units.
084113 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C.
Structural Loads:
D.
1.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Deflection of Framing Members:

1.
2.
E.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to

glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm),
whichever is less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm),
whichever is smaller.
Structural-Test Performance:
ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.
F.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested
according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
G.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
H.
Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
2.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on
framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
AAMA 501.5.
a.
b.
3.
High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metalsurface temperature of 180 deg F (82 deg C).
Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C).
Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C).
084113 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
I.
Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing
areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
J.
Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas
having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.23 W/sq. m x K)
when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminumframed systems.
B.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
D.
Other Action Submittals:

1.
E.
Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,

detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and
related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door
hardware.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
2.
Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems.

Include design calculations.
F.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
G.
Seismic Qualification Certificates:

components, from manufacturer.
1.
For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
H.

testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance
requirements.
I.
Source quality-control reports.
084113 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
J.
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
K.
Warranties: Sample of warranties.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop

Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
systems similar to those indicated for this Project.
C.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1.
Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.
D.
Accessible Entrances:
Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
E.
Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems:

manufacturer.
1.7
Obtain from single source from single
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed

systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
Failure of operating components.
084113 - 4
20-14084.00
2.
B.
4 MAY 2015
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1.
1.9
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Entrance Door Hardware:

1.
2.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,
and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware
operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those
used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirementsavailable manufacturers offering

1.
EFCO Corporation.
2.
Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
3.
Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
4.
YKK AP America Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum:
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness

required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
Construction: Thermally improved.
084113 - 5
20-14084.00
2.
3.
4 MAY 2015
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

Glazing Plane: Center.
B.
Brackets and Reinforcements:

Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C.
Fasteners and Accessories:

Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
3.
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads fabricated from stainless
steel.
D.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
F.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants:

manufacturer for joint type.
2.4
Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or

extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A.
Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1.
Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch(3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
2.
Door Design: Narrow stile; 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) nominal width.

a.
3.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a.
B.
Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255
mm) above floor or ground plane.
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
084113 - 6
20-14084.00
2.6
4 MAY 2015
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in

Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
Bituminous Paint:
Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for
spandrel glazing.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
C.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
D.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
2.
E.
At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
2.
At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable

strip and mortised into door edge.
At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
F.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
G.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
084113 - 7
20-14084.00
2.8
4 MAY 2015
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
2.
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware:
Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
084113 - 8
20-14084.00
H.
3.3
4 MAY 2015
Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce
weathertight installation.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:
1.
2.
Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3
mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
Alignment:
a.
b.
B.
3.4
Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8
mm).
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by

manufacturer.
1.
For entrance doors, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to
move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to
the leading door edge.
084113 - 9
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1.
Storefront framing.
2.
Glazed entrances.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 084113 "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
C.
Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
D.
Glass Thicknesses:
ASTM C 1036.
E.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.3
Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
A.
1.4
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square.
1.
Insulating glass.
C.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer
for each glass type.
GLAZING
088000 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer
for each product and installation method.
C.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
D.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's
name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
E.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
1.
2.
1.6
Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and

Storefronts" and Section 084413 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match glazing
systems required for Project, including glazing methods.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

A.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B.
Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing
channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in

which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal
under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating
GLAZING
088000 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of

vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses
as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
1.
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float
glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide
Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass
is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1.
For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
2.
U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
3.
Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
4.
Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.2
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
1.

a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
2.
3.
C.
AFG Industries, Inc

Guardian Industries Corp
Pilkington North America
PPG Industries, Inc
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel

to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
Reflective-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376, coated by sputter-coating process, and

complying with other requirements specified.
GLAZING
088000 - 3
20-14084.00
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG

Industries, Inc.; Solarban 60 Solar Control Low E or comparable product by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
4 MAY 2015
AFG Industries, Inc

Kind: Kind CV (coated vision glass), except that Kind CO coated overhead glass may be
used where the lower edge of the glass is more than 6 feet (1.8 m) above the adjacent floor
level or cannot be approached closer than 10 feet (3.0 m).
Coating Color: Silver.
Glass: Clear float.
Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum.
Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 percent maximum.
INSULATING GLASS
A.

a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by

a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.4
AFG Industries, Inc

PPG Industries, Inc
Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.
Spacer: Manufacturers standard.
The glass U value: .60 or less
SHGC: .25 or less
Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by

designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
GLAZING
088000 - 4
20-14084.00
E.
2.5
4 MAY 2015
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A.
2.6
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
A.
Glass Type: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass.
Interspace Content: Air.
Indoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass.
Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.45 maximum.
Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.45 maximum.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40 maximum.
Glass Type T: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered glass.
Interspace Content: Air.
Indoor Lite: Fully tempered glass.
Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.45 maximum.
Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.45 maximum.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40 maximum.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1.
2.
GLAZING
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets
at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep systems.
088000 - 5
20-14084.00
3.
4.
B.
3.2
4 MAY 2015
Minimum required face and edge clearances.

Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B.
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide
necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,
with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
1.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
F.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
G.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
H.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior as specified.
I.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
GLAZING
088000 - 6
20-14084.00
J.
3.4
4 MAY 2015
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.5

A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent
labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
GLAZING
088000 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 09111 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.
1.3
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and
exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof
trusses.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
A.
Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless
09111 - 1
20-14084.00
B.
Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs
and runners.
1.
Steel Studs and Runners:

a.
b.
2.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:

a.
b.
C.

Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
D.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness,

with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
2.
G.
Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System.

Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:

indicated.
1.
F.
Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.

MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track.
Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series.
Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
1.
E.
4 MAY 2015
Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-)
thick, galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1.
09111 - 2
20-14084.00
2.
2.3
4 MAY 2015
Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosionresistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent
testing agency.
C.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in
diameter.
D.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053

inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
E.
Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1.
2.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum

1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
3.
Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a.
b.
4.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.
a.
F.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm).
Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1.

a.
b.
c.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.

Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
09111 - 3
20-14084.00
2.4
4 MAY 2015
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1.
2.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt:

ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
3.2
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.3
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
09111 - 4
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a.
5.
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
Curved Partitions:
a.
b.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches (150 mm) o.c.
E.
Direct Furring:
1.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
F.
Z-Furring Members:
1.
Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
2.
At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.4
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A.
Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
09111 - 5
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4 MAY 2015
Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.

Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads

within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3
mm in 3.6 m measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
between parallel members that will receive finishes.
09111 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Interior gypsum board.
Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.

Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
1.4
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following, but
are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
Temple-Inland.
USG Corporation.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
C.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1.
2.
D.
Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
1.
2.
E.
Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1.
2.
3.
2.3


.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
GYPSUM BOARD
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
092900 - 2
20-14084.00
e.
f.
g.
B.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1.

the following.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.4
4 MAY 2015
Fry Reglet Corp.

Gordon, Inc.
Pittcon Industries.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
1.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 3
20-14084.00
C.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
4 MAY 2015
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
D.
Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.

Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
Pecora Corporation; [AC-20 FTR] [AIS-919].
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 4
20-14084.00
F.
4 MAY 2015
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc., except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m)
in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.

Type X: As indicated on Drawings.
Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
b.
3.
4.
C.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application:
1.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm)
minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fireresistance-rated assembly.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 5
20-14084.00
2.
3.
4.
4 MAY 2015
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical
joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
E.
Curved Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.4
Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,

across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves
and tangent to them.
For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm)
o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with
screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1.
2.
3.
D.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 6
20-14084.00
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels:

ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
3.6
4 MAY 2015
Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150
mm) in size.
1.4
A.
1.5
Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
095113 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
C.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
2.3
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong, Random Fissured Fiberglass or
comparable product by one of the following:
1.
CertainTeed Corp.
2.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
B.
Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as
follows:
1.
Type and Form: Type XII, glass-fiber base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 1,
plastic.
2.
Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
C.
Color: White.
D.
LR: Not less than 0.75.
095113 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
E.
NRC: Not less than 0.55.
F.
Edge/Joint Detail: Square.
G.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).
H.
Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm).
I.
Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels
treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,
mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or
bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to
ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A.
Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
B.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
C.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Size:
Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire.
D.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
E.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch(1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.
F.
Seismic Stabilizer Bars:

Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to
accommodate seismic forces.
G.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic

forces.
H.
Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
panels in place.
095113 - 3
20-14084.00
2.5
4 MAY 2015
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with
prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

CertainTeed Corp.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

End Condition of Cross Runners: butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

CertainTeed Corp.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1.
2.
Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and
suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
095113 - 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic
design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger
involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to
age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners
that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches
(200 mm) from ends of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing
wires into concrete with postinstalled anchors.
095113 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system
to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
2.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a.
Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space.
2.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension-system runners and moldings.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
3.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
095113 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1.
Steel.
2.
Galvanized metal.
B.
1.
1.3
Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates with
primers specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.

Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 1
20-14084.00
C.
4 MAY 2015
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1.
2.
3.
1.5
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with
the proposed product highlighted.
VOC content.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a.
3.
4.
1.6
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
2.
1.7
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, SW will be used to designate Sherwin

Williams throughout this Section, provide comparable products by one of the following:
1.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.
Davis Paint Company.
3.
Duron, Inc.
4.
ICI Paints.
5.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
6.
Pratt & Lambert.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3
METAL PRIMERS
A.
2.4
Primer: SW Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer B66-310, 5-10 mils wet, 2-4 mils dry
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1) CMU: 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW A-100 Satin Latex House
and Trim - Waterborne - A82 Series. 4 mils wet,1.3 mils dry per coat
B.
Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5) Exterior Metal: 2nd and 3rd Coats - SW DTM Semigloss - Waterborne - B66-200 Series. 6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"

applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
E.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
F.
Galvanized metal surfaces: Remove dirt and grease with non-hydrocarbon cleaner (e.g. Simple
Green reduced to no more than 30:1 with water, 4 oz. Simple Green to 1 gallon water.) Use a
low pressure sprayer to apply cleaning solution, wait a few minutes (not more than 20) before
rinsing, if rinsing is not practical, then wipe with a damp cloth followed by wiping with a clean dry
cloth. (If time allows, air dry may be substituted.)
G.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Manual."
1.
2.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 4
20-14084.00
3.
4.
5.
6.
4 MAY 2015
Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
frames.
Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate
identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4

A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
3.5
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A.
CMU Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior.

Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based.

Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5).
Aluminum Substrates:
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 5
20-14084.00
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
D.
4 MAY 2015
Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum.

Stainless-Steel Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based.

EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 102800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications
Sections.
B.
Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to
materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory
unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to
avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and
servicing of toilet accessory items.
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any
mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period.
B.
C.
The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
102800 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
American Specialties, Inc.

Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
McKinney/Parker.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034 inch minimum thickness.
B.
Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366, 0.04 inch minimum.
preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
C.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527 G60.
D.
Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC
2.
2.3
Surface
TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A.
2.4
See Drawings for required accessories
FABRICATION
A.
General: Only a maximum 1-1/2 inch diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as
approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either
interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by either a
printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product
model number.
B.
General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units.
On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each
accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating
manufacturer's name and product model number.
C.
Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units
with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous
stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
102800 - 2
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for
servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored
in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, complying with ASTM F 446.
3.2
A.
Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly.
Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after
removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
102800 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Soil treatment with termiticide.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure

process.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of termite control product.

1.
Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
C.
Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer.
D.
Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report
for Owner's records and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
1.4
Date and time of application.

Moisture content of soil before application.
Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
Areas of application.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is
located, and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products.
TERMITE CONTROL
313116- 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according
to the EPA-Registered Label.
C.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer].
1.5
Obtain termite control products from single source from single
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or
frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPARegistered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations.
Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and
Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment,
will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is
discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite
infestation.
1.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide
quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide
concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
1.

a.
b.
c.
2.
BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor.

Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75.
FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group;
Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than
three years against infestation of subterranean termites.
TERMITE CONTROL
313116- 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with
earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions
affecting performance of termite control.
B.
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control
treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such
as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from
soil within and around foundations.
B.
Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide
manufacturer.
1.
3.3
Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
3.4
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A.
Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
1.
2.
3.
Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs:

Underground-supported slab construction,
including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil
materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.
Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation
walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric
conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases;
and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil
washout around footings.
Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat
adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases.
TERMITE CONTROL
313116- 3
20-14084.00
4.
5.
4 MAY 2015
Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or
ground.
Masonry: Treat voids.
Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B.
Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C.
Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until groundsupported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label
instructions.
D.
Post warning signs in areas of application.
E.
Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,

landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
TERMITE CONTROL
313116- 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16050
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Description:
1. Provide all materials, tools, and labor for a complete electrical installation as shown
on the contract documents and indicated in the specifications.
2. Procure all permits and licences.
3. Coordinate the electrical installation with the following:
a. Architect
b. Contractors of other trades.
c. Local Electrical and Building Inspectors, or the authority having jurisdiction.
d. Local Utility companies serving the project.
B. Related Documents:
1. Electrical, "E-" , drawings
2. All working drawings included in the contract documents.
3. Specifications of the following divisions/sections:
a. Division 1: General Requirements
b. Division 3: Concrete
c. Division 11: Equipment
d. Division 15: Mechanical
1.02 ABBREVIATIONS:
A. The following abbreviations are used throughout Division 16 specifications:
1. AFF: Above Finished Floor
2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
3. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
4. HVAC: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
5. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
6. IES: Illuminating Engineering Society
7. ITL: Independent Testing Laboratories
8. NEC: National Electrical Code
9. NECA: National Electrical Contractor Association
10. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
11. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
12. NIC: Not in contract
13. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.03 DEFINITIONS:
A. "Provide" means to furnish and install.
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. Comply with the following codes and published standards which are applicable to the
electrical installation of this project:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 2005 edition
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
SECTION 16050
20-14084.00
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
4 MAY 2015
International Fire Code, 2011 Edition

International Building Code, 2009 Edition
Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Directory ( "green book" )
Underwriters Laboratories Electrical General Information ( "white book" )
NFPA 72
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
1.05 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

A. Use materials that are new and, where UL or ITL has established standards, listed
and/or labeled.
B. Organize and execute work so that finished appearance is neat; mechanical, plumb
when vertical and level when horizontal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Provide equipment, products and materials shown on the drawings, as specified
in the specifications or added by addendum.
2.02 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS:
A. Refer to Contract Conditions.
2.03 CONCRETE:
A. Refer to Division 3 specifications.
2.04 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS:
A. 3/4"x size indicated on the drawings, A/D grade, paint two coats gray enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 VISIT TO SITE:
A. Prior to submitting bid, visit site and become familiar with the existing conditions
relating to Division 16 work.
3.02 EXISTING FACILITIES:
A. Coordinate the interface between the existing systems and the respective extensions
and/or new systems.
3.03 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS:
A. Cover fixtures, equipment and apparatus for protection against dirt, water, chemical or
mechanical damage before and during construction.
B. Keep all conduit and other openings protected against entry of foreign matter.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
SECTION 16050
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
C. Restore the original finish, including shop coat, of fixtures, apparatus or equipment
that has been damaged prior to substantial completion.
3.04 COORDINATION:
A. Prior to rough-in of any materials, coordinate with subcontractors the physical
clearances for and sequencing of Division 16 work as it interfaces with and relates to
architectural, structural, plumbing and HVAC systems.
3.05 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit as prescribed in Divison 1 shop drawings and/or product data for the
electrical equipment and materials listed below. Check for compliance with contract
documents and certify compliance by affixing Electrical Contractor's "Approved"
stamp and signature.
1. Shop drawings and product data:
a. Switchgear, Distribution Panelboards, Panelboards, and Loadcenters
b. Life Safety System ( fire alarm )
2. Product data only:
a. Conduits, Couplings, Connectors, and Fittings
b. Wiring Devices and Coverplates ( receptacles, switches, wallbox dimmers)
c. Fuses and Circuit Breakers
d. Junction Boxes, Outlet Boxes, and Floor Boxes
e. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps
f. Disconnect Switches, Motor Starters, and Motor Switches
g. Wire and Cable
h. Time Clocks, Relays, Contactors, and Photocells
B. Refer to respective sections for submittal instructions where instructions have been
prescribed.
C. Obtain shop drawing review by engineer before purchase of any equipment requiring
shop drawing submittals.
D. Include with the electrical distribution equipment submittal a plan view of each electrical
room or area designated for electrical distribution equipment. Use 1/2" = 1' scale and show the
submitted equipment laid out in each room/area. Label each piece of equipment and indicate the
required maintenance clearance by a dashed line.
3.06 CERTIFICATION AND TEST REPORTS:
A. Submit the following certifications and test reports to the Architect in the format and at the time
prescribed in Division 1:
1. Certifications:
a. Life Safety System
2. Test Reports:
a. Megger test for all feeders and Service Entrance conductors.
3.07 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Submit the following maintenance manuals and operating instructions to the Architect
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
SECTION 16050
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
as prescribed in Division 1:
1. Life Safety System
B. Use a separate three ring binder for each maintenance manual and include wiring
diagrams, maintenance instructions, parts list, maintenance tools list, manufacturer's
and nearest dealer's name, addresses and telephone numbers. Organize into sections
with index thumb-tab markers.
C. Use a three ring binder for operating instructions with a separate thumb-tab in each
section for each system or major item. Include in the instructions start-up, operation
sequence, control, shut-down, safety features and seasonal adjustments.
3.08 OPERATIONAL TEST
A. At the time of the substantial completion job observation, perform a test of all light
fixtures, electrical systems, equipment, machinery and appliances, in the presence
of the Architect or his representative, which demonstrates that all of Division 16 systems
are operational.
3.09 JOB OBSERVATION ASSISTANCE:
A. During all job observations, provide an electrician with tools and volt/ammeter to
accompany Architect and/or his representative.
B. Remove any covers, trims or wiring devices and open all cabinets, disconnect switches
or other equipment served electrically and designated by the Architect or his
representative.
C. Restore removed or opened equipment to its installed or closed position after the job
observation.
3.10 OWNER INSTRUCTION AND ASSISTANCE:
A. At substantial job completion job observation, instruct the Owner's operating personnel
in the operation, sequencing, maintenance and safety/emergency provisions of the
electrical systems.
3.11 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
A. Record on one set of electrical drawings all changes, deviations and underground
conduits. Transfer same to a reproducible sepia and deliver same to architect as per
Division 1.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
SECTION 16050
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Description:
1. Provide continuous conduit systems - beginning at the service point, to all
distribution equipment and to every outlet and piece of electrical equipment
with conduits, couplers, supports, hangers, fittings, bushings and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 16050: Electrical General
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID STEEL AND INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT:
A. Conduit:
1. Rigid ferrous steel pipe, hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized with smooth interior.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Allied
b. Triangle
c. Wheatland
B. Couplings and Connectors:
1. Couplings:
a. Hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized ferrous steel, threaded
2. Connectors:
a. Steel or malleable iron, threaded with throat bushing, lock nuts and, where
prescribed, grounding lugs.
3. Erickson:
a. Malleable iron, concrete tight
a. Appleton
b. Crouse Hinds
c. Steel City
d. Thomas & Betts
C: Joint Compound:
1. Anti-seize lubricant with rust and corrosion inhibitors and colloidal copper
a. Thomas & Betts
RACEWAYS
SECTION 16110
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
D. Expansion Fittings:
1. Steel with three cap nuts, phenolic bushing, packing ring, metallic copper
grounding ring and copper bonding jumper.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Crouse Hinds "XJ"
b. O.Z. Gedney "AX" or "DX"
c. Appleton "XJ"
2.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
A. Conduit:
1. Thin wall ferrous steel tubing, hot-dipped galvanized, smooth interior, square
and reamed ends
a. Allied
b. Wheatland
c. Triangle
1. Couplings:
a. Steel, compression type, installed where exposed to moisture
b. Steel, setscrew type, when installed indoors
2. Connectors:
a. Steel, compression type with nylon insulated bushings, locknuts, and where
prescribed, grounding lugs, installed where exposed to moisture.
b. Steel, setscrew type with nylon insulated bushings, locknuts, and where
prescribed, grounding lugs, installed indoors.
C. Expansion Fittings:
1. Steel with three cap nuts, phenolic bushing, packing ring, metallic copper
grounding ring and copper bonding jumper.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Crouse Hinds "XJ"
b. O.Z. Gedney "AX" or "DX"
c. Appleton "XJ"
2.03 RIDGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT:
A. Conduit:
1. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), resistant to crushing, moisture, low temprature,
and corrosive agents in standard trade sizes.
1. Couplings: Schedule 40 PVC
2. Connectors: Schedule 40 PVC with lock nuts
C. Expansion Fittings:
1. Schedule 40 PVC with grommeted inner cylinder and outer sleeve
D. Joint Cement:
1. PVC solvent
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
RACEWAYS
SECTION 16110
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4 MAY 2015
Carlon
Cantex
Wheatland
2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT:

A. Conduit:
1. Galvanized steel single strip, interlocked, smooth inside and out, with liquid-tight
flexible polyvinyl chloride outer jacket.
a. Carlon
b. Wheatland
c. Allied
B. Fittings:
1. Threaded corrosion-resistant steel or malleable iron with insulated throat bushing,
liquid tight, locknuts and external ground lugs.
a. Appleton
b. O.Z. Gedney
c. Thomas & Betts
2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT:
A. Conduit:
1. Galvanized steel single strip, interlocked, smooth inside and out.
a. AFC
b. Alflex
c. General Cable
B. Fittings:
1. Threaded corrosion-resistant steel or malleable iron with insulated throat bushing
and lock nuts.
a. Appleton
b. O.Z. Gedney
c. Thomas & Betts
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS:
A. Provide Rigid Metal Conduit or Intermediate Metallic Conduit for service entrance,
feeders, in slab on grade, areas where exposed to moisture, exposed on exterior
surfaces, and exposed interior from floor to 10'-0" or where exposed to physical abuse.
B. Provide Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) for interior power circuits, branch circuits
and system circuits in walls, elevated concrete slabs ( those not on grade), plenums,
attics or exposed above 10'-0", where not exposed to moisture.
RACEWAYS
SECTION 16110
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
C. Provide Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit for service ground, in slab on grade, in direct contact with
earth, exposed in corrosive environments above 10'-0" above floor, or service entrance when
encased in concrete.
D. Provide Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit for final connecting link (minimum of 12",
maximum of 36") to the following:
1. Plumbing equipment
2. Kitchen equipment
3. Exterior Mechanical equipment
E. Provide Flexible Metal Conduit for:
1. Final connection link ( minimum of 12", maximum of 36" ) to:
a. Motors
b. Transformers
c. Mechanical equipment
2. Connections between junction boxes and accessible recessed lighting fixtures.
3.02 CONDUIT SUPPORT
A. Intervals: Maximum 10 feet on center and within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction
box, cabinet or fitting.
B. Conduits 3/4" and smaller:
1. Method
a. When single conduit: Attach directly to building structure or suspend with
1/4" rod.
b. When multiple parallel and adjacent conduits and:
1) When horizontal at structure: Attach directly to structure or to support
framing attached to structure.
2) When horizontally suspended: Attach to support framing, suspended from
building structure.
3) When vertical: Attach to support framing attached to building structure,
wall structure or suspended from building structure.
2. Conduit attachment:
a. When direct to structure or single conduit suspended: Spring steel friction,
spring steel latching or clamped with bolts or screws.
b. When on support framing: Two section bolted conduit clamp.
3. Structural steel attachment
a. When single conduit: Spring steel friction, clamp with bolt or bolted
b. When hanger rod: Clamp with bolt or bolted
4. Concrete attachment: Steel preformed conduit clamp. Attach clamp with expansion
anchor installed in drilled hole or with power fastening anchor designed to meet
concrete specification. In either case, maintain design support of 300% or greater
of load.
5. Wood attachment: Wood screws or bolted with design support of 300% or greater
of load.
C. For 1" or larger:
1. Method:
a. When single conduit: Attach directly to building structure or suspend with
threaded rod.
b.
RACEWAYS
When multiple parallel and adjacent conduits: Attach to support framing
SECTION 16110
20-14084.00
2.
3.
4.
5.
4 MAY 2015
attached to building structure, wall structure or suspended from building

structure.
Conduit attachment:
a. When single conduit: Bolted clamp
b. When on support framing: Two section bolted conduit clamp
Structural steel attachment: Beam clamps with bolts or bolted directly to steel.
Concrete attachment: Provide preset insert prior to concrete pour or coordinate
drill locations with Architect. When drilling provide expansion anchors. In either
case, maintain design support of 300% or greater of load.
Wood attachment: Wood screws or bolted with design support of 300% or greater
of load.
D. Framing:
1. Attachment, suspension and bearing members capable of supporting 300% of load.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. For conduit layout follow, generally, the diagrammatic layout shown on plans. Provide
offsets and routing changes to avoid structural, architectural or equipment elements.
B. Provide 1/2" minimum size conduit.
C. Conceal all conduit except where shown to be exposed. Install conduit concealed
above a lay-in ceiling with clearance to allow easy removal of ceiling panels.
D. Install exposed conduit parallel with or perpendicular to building walls at greatest
height possible. Paint exposed conduit two coats of color directed by Architect.
E. Extend homeruns from outlets shown to panel designated. Do not combine homeruns.
F. Use benders designed for the size and type of conduit. Limit each bend to 90 degrees
or less with a radius 10 times conduit diameter or greater for telephone system and 6
times conduit diameter or greater for all other systems.
G. Provide insulated bushings at each end of every conduit run.
H. Provide joint compound on rigid steel conduit and intermediate metallic conduit joints.
I.
Provide an Erickson type coupling where two segments of a conduit run must be joined
and neither can be rotated.
J.
Close all conduit ends during construction with plastic conduit plugs.
K. Install conduit no greater than 1" trade size in concrete slabs. Route conduit between
top and bottom reinforcing steel and space parallel runs a minimum of 3" apart.
L. Install conduit above water and steam piping where possible.
M. Maintain grounding of metallic raceways with clean and tight connections. Provide
grounding conductor in plastic and flexible conduit.
N. Provide ground lugs on all conduit connectors to service equipment enclosures.
RACEWAYS
SECTION 16110
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
O. Provide grounding wedge lugs or locknuts designed to bite metal on conduit

connectors to panel cabinet or pullboxes.
P. Seal all conduits which extend from the interior to the exterior of the building to
prevent the circulation of air.
Q. Provide a thruwall waterproof seal on each conduit that penetrates a wall at a below
grade level.
R. Provide an expansion fitting in each conduit crossing a building expansion joint and
locate the fitting at the joint. Also provide expansion fittings in building conduits
exceeding 100 feet at intervals of 100 feet.
S. Where liquids are present, form drip loops in liquid-tight flexible conduit to prevent
liquid from running into connections.
T. Blow out and swab all conduit clear of trash and water prior to pulling wire.
U. Provide a nylon pullcord in all empty conduits.
V. In mechanical equipment rooms where a piece of equipment is located more than 2 feet
away from walls or columns, serve equipment from underfloor or provide a vertical
conduit, minimum 1", attached to floor and ceiling with conductors entering and exiting
conduit through conduit bodies.
W. Coordinate conduit supports in precast or cast-in-place concrete prior to pour.
X. Provide a fire rated seal on each conduit that penetrates any floor or fire rated partition. Match
seal rating to floor or partition rating.
Y. Provide an explosion-proof seal in each conduit run where it enters and leaves a hazardous
location.
3.04 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION
A. Where exterior of building bury conduit a minimum of 30" below finished grade.
B. Encase conduit in 3" concrete envelope where it passes under driveways, roadways
or entrances to parking lots.
C. When under interior slab on grade seal vapor barrier around conduit penetration.
END OF SECTION OF 16110
RACEWAYS
SECTION 16110
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Description:
1. Provide continuous color coded conductors beginning at service point to distribution
equipment and to each outlet and each piece of electrical energy consuming equipment.
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS:
A. Copper Conductors:
1. Soft drawn annealed copper, 98 % conductivity, without weld, splice or joint
throughout its length; uniform in cross section without flaws, scales, or other
imperfections with THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation.
a. Anaconda
b. Phelps Dodge
c. Pirelli Cable
d. Senator
e. Southwire
f. Triangle
B. Configuration:
1. No. 10 and smaller:
Solid
2. No. 8 and larger:
Stranded
C. Insulation - 600 Volts:
THHN, THWN
XHHW
D. Jacket Color:
Uniform colored jacket

Black
E. Jacket Markings:
1. Voltage
2. Insulation type
3. Conductor Size
4. Conductor type
CONDUCTORS
SECTION 160120
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
2.02 COLOR CODING TAPE:

A. Vinyl 3/4" wide with uniform color and adhesive backing.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Brady
2. 3M
3. Plymouth
4. Thomas & Betts
2.03 SPLICE AND TAP MATERIALS:
A. No. 10 and smaller:
1. Crimp type: Cylindrically shaped conductor sleeve for crimping copper conductors.
Insulated with nylon or plastic cover.
2. Twist on: Inner spiral spring or threads for holding and making electrical contact
between copper conductors and with outer long skirted insulated cover of nylon or
plastic.
B. No. 8 and Larger:
1. Set-screw or bolted type: Metal connectors for joining copper to copper, with bolts or
set-screws to apply pressure to conductors. Insulate with nylon or plastic cover or with
electrical tape.
2. Pressure type: Metal connectors for joining copper to copper, copper to aluminum, or
aluminum to aluminum with power operated crimping tool. Insulate with nylon or plastic
cover or with electrical tape.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. AMP
2. Burndy
3. Ideal
4. Ilsco
5. Panduit
6. 3M
7. Thomas & Betts
2.04 CONDUCTOR TERMINALS:
A. Copper conductors: High conductivity copper terminal designed to hold conductor and
make electrical contact by bolt, setscrew or power crimp and with spade to match equipment
receiving conductor.
1. Burndy
2. Ideal
3. Ilsco
4. Panduit
5. Thomas & Betts
2.05 CONDUCTOR HARNESS:
A. Plastic or nylon self-locking straps (commonly refered to as zip-ties or tie-wraps).
CONDUCTORS
SECTION 160120
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
1. Panduit
2. Thomas & Betts
2.06 WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT:
A. Lubricating, insulating and chemically neutral to conductors, conductor insulation
and conduits.
1. Greenlee
2. Ideal
3. Polywater
2.07 ELECTRICAL TAPE:
A. Vinyl plastic; moisture tight, resistant to ultraviolet radiation, alkalies, acids and
corrosion; chemically neutral to conductors and conductor insulation; fire retardant;
and single thickness dielectric strength equal to or greater than 10,000V.
1. Scotch/3M
2. Plymouth
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install the number of conductors indicated with a minimum of two (2) conductors being
installed in each conduit not prescribed to be empty.
B. Minimum Conductor Size: No. 12
C. Complete installation of raceway run prior to pulling conductors.
D. Install insulated bushings in conduit fittings prior to pulling conductors.
E. Use wire pulling lubricants to reduce stress on conductors. Pull all conductors of a run
together. Use pulling methods which do not damage the raceway or conductors.
F. Color Coding:
1. No. 8 and smaller: Uniform colored jacket with respective color below.
2. No. 6 and larger: Two wraps of tape applied within 6" of each conductor end with
respective color below.
3. Conductor Color Code:
Voltage
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Ground
CONDUCTORS
208Y/120
Black
Red
Blue
White
480Y/277
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Gray
Green
240D/120
Black
Blue
Orange (208V)
White
SECTION 160120
20-14084.00
Isolated Ground
4.
4 MAY 2015
Green w/ White Stripe
For Different Voltages in Same Enclosure: Use a colored stripe (not green) on one
neutral to differentiate between systems. Keep stripe color consistent throughout
project.
G. At outlets leave a minimum of 12" of conductor ends at each fixture outlet, device outlet
and equipment outlet box.
H. Conductor Terminals:
1. Single: Use terminals on conductors no. 8 and larger where equipment receiving
conductors do not have conductor lugs with set-screw(s)
2. Multiple: Install terminals on conductors where more than one conductor is
connected to a single lug.
I.
Route conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers and terminal
cabinets parallel to or at right angle to the enclosure's sides and tops. Group and
harness conductors in those enclosures using conductor harness straps.
J.
Prior to energizing conductor, megger test conductors for continuity and shorts.
Correct deficiencies prior to energizing.
K. Apply aluminum oxide inhibiting compound to the ends of all conductors prior to
installing terminals or installing in mechanical lugs.
L. Tighten all bolted connections in and to mechanical lugs to torque rating specified per
manufacturers recommendations.
M. Tighten all conductors with mechanical connections, torqued in accordance with the
conductor and/or connector manufacturers markings as well as the values referenced
in the following publications:
1. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Directory (Green Book).
2. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical General Information (White Book).
CONDUCTORS
SECTION 160120
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16130
BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Description:
1. Provide electrical boxes or, where prescribed, conduit bodies for devices, outlets,
splice connection points, raceway junction and conductor pulling points complete
with supports, covers and accessories.
1. Section 16050: Electrical General.
C. Standards:
1. Underwriters Labratories labeled and listed for application specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES AND EXTENSIONS:
A. Galvanized steel, UL listed for application with conduit knockouts and threaded holes
for mounting devices and/or coverplates.
B. Minimum Sizes:
1. Single Device: 3"H x 2"W x 2"D
2. Gang Device:
3"H x 2"W (per gang) x 2"D
3. Octagonal:
4"W x 1-1/2"D
4. Square:
4" Square x 1-1/2"D
1. Appleton
2. Raco
3. Steel City
4. American Electric
2.02 CONCRETE BOXES:
A. Galvanized steel for encasing in concrete with conduit knockouts and threaded holes
for mounding devices and/or coverplates.
1. Appleton
2. Crouse Hinds
3. Raco
4. Steel City
2.03 MASONRY BOXES:
BOXES
SECTION 16130
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
A. Galvanized steel for mounting in masonry walls with conduit knockouts and threaded
holes for mounding devices and/or coverplates.
1. Appleton
2. Raco
3. Steel City
4. Crouse Hinds
2.04 CAST BOXES:
A. Cast malleable iron, cadmium/zinc plated finish, NEMA 3R, threaded conduit entries,
neoprene coverplates gasket and threaded holes for mounting devices and/or
coverplates.
1. Appleton
2. Crouse Hinds
3. Raco
4. Steel City
2.05 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:
A. Dry Locations: Galvanized sheet steel, NEMA 1, welded seams and cover held by
stainless steel screws or bolts.
B. Damp or Wet Locations: Cast malleable iron with corrosion-resistant finish, NEMA 3R,
threaded conduit entries, neoprene coverplate gasket, and coverplate held by stainless
steel bolts.
1. Appleton
2. Crouse Hinds
3. Hoffman
4. Killark
2.06 FLOOR BOXES:
A. As specified on the drawings for particular application.
2.07 PLASTIC BOXES
A. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl cloride
1. Carlon
2. Queen City
3. Raco
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DEVICE APPLICATIONS
BOXES
SECTION 16130
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
A. Boxes for switches, receptacles, dimmers (designed for device box mounting) and
future devices:
1. For dry Locations:
a. When recessed:
1) For construction other than concrete or masonry, use interior outlet box.
2) For concrete: Concrete box
3) For masonry: Masonry box or square interior outlet box with masonry
extension.
b. When surface: Cast box
2. For Damp or Wet Locations:
a. When recessed:
2) For masonry: Masonry box or square interior outlet box with masonry
extension.
b. When surface: Cast box
3. For hazardous Areas: Hazardous area boxes
3.02 GENERAL APPLICATIONS
A. For lighting fixtures, equipment connections, pullboxes for conduit 1" and smaller, and
junction boxes for conduits 1" and smaller.
1. Recessed Interior Box:
a. For construction other than concrete or masonry, use octagonal or square
interior outlet box.
b. For concrete: Concrete box
c. For masonry: Concrete box or square interior box with masonry extension.
2. Box Above an Accessible Ceiling: Octagonal or square interior outlet box.
3. Exposed Interior Box:
a. Above 7'-0":
Octagonal or square interior outlet box or conduit body.
b. 7'-0" and below: Cast box or conduit body..
4. Exterior Box:
a. When recessed in vertical element or ceiling:
2) For masonry: Concrete box or square interior box with masonry
extension.
3) For construction other than concrete or masonry, provide square interior
box.
b. Flush mounted in ground: Cast junction box
c. Exposed: Cast box or conduit body.
B. Hazardous Locations: Hazardous area box
C. Integrally Mounted Boxes: Boxes which are an integral part of an equipment assembly
from the manufacturer and are UL listed for the application may be used in lieu of the
boxes prescribed above.
3.03 JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES (conduits larger than 1"):
A. Junction boxes or conduit bodies where junction is exposed
BOXES
SECTION 16130
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
3.04 SUPPORT:
A. General: Support each box from the building structure independently of conduit as
follows, utilizing a support system capable of carrying 300% of load.
1. Surface:
a. Structural Steel: Bolted directly to steel member or bolted to spring clip which is
clipped to steel member.
b. Concrete: Power driven fastener or bolt to expansion anchor set in drilled hole.
c. Wood: Screw or bolt to wood.
2. Suspended: Bolted to engineered spring clip which is clipped to suspended ceiling
system.
3. Recessed:
a. Concrete: Set in concrete prior to pour.
b. Masonry: Set or cut into masonry during masonry errection. Grout in around box.
c. Drywall: Attach directly to stud or joist by screw or bolt; or directly to a galvanized
steel support which is attached directly at each end to stud or joist by screw or bolt.
d. Earth: Compact earth around box
3.05 INSTALLATION:
A. Outlet locations indicated on the plans are approximate. Coordinate and determine the
exact location at the building. The architect reserves the right to shift the exact location
of any outlet 10 feet before it is permanently installed.
B. Install boxes plumb when vertical, level when horizontal and flush adjacent surface
when recessed.
C. Where an outlet occurs in an architectural feature, center the outlet in same.
D. Where the mounting height of a wall outlet is not shown, mount at height directed by
Architect. Mounting heights are from finished floor to box centerline.
E. The contractor may, with Architect's approval, slightly vary an outlet's mounting height
so that the box's top or bottom occurs at a masonry joint.
F. Where outlets at different levels are shown adjacent, install them on the same vertical line.
G. Space wall switch outlets with first gang box 4" from door trim on the installed strike side.
H. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so that covers are accessible and removable.
I.
Limit masonry cuts from outlet boxes so that coverplate covers the cut.
J.
Provide plaster rings for all boxes set in plaster walls or ceilings.
K. Match configuration to application.

L. Utilize box size (capacity) based upon NEC.
M. For devices, utilize boxes designed to support the device independently of coverplate
and so install.
N. Cover unused conduit openings with plastic covers for sheet steel boxes and threaded
BOXES
SECTION 16130
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
plugs for cast boxes.

O. Prior to pulling conductors or installing devices, clean boxes of dirt, debris and water.
P. Cover all boxes and secure with screws or bolts.
Q. Install pullboxes to limit pulling distance and/or pulling bends.
BOXES
SECTION 16130
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Description:
1. Provide switches, receptacles, dimmers and other strap mounted wiring devices
as shown on the drawings.
2. Section 16130: Boxes
C. Standards:
1. Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled.
2. NEMA ( configurations as listed )
1.02 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Switches, Receptacles, and Coverplates:
1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Hubbell Incorporated,
Wiring Device Division; referred to as Hubbell.
2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified
manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable
for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list.
a. Arrow-Hart
b. Bryant
c. Leviton
d. Pass and Seymor/Legrand
e. Slater
3. Manufacturers product numbers listed below do not include color selection. Refer
to Section 16140, 2.06 for device colors
B. Acceptable Manufacturers of Wallbox Dimmer Switches:
1. Lutron, Nova Series.
2. Lightolier, Neptune Momentium Series.
2.01 RECEPTACLES:
A. Duplex - 15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-15R.
1. Hubbell # 5262.
B. Duplex - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-20R.
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16140
20-14084.00
1.
4 MAY 2015
Hubbell # 5362.
C. Single - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-20R.
1. Hubbell # 5361.
D. Duplex Isolated Ground - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring with insulated/
isolated ground screw, NEMA 5-20R.
1. Hubbell # IG5362.
E. Duplex Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, pigtail wiring,
thru wiring to protect 4 receptacles downstream, test and reset buttons, NEMA 5-20R.
1. Hubbell # GF5362.
F. Duplex Twist Lock - 15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring with ground screw,
NEMA L5-15R.
1. Hubbell # 4700.
G. Duplex Isolated Ground Twist Lock - 15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring
with insulated/isolated ground screw, NEMA L5-15R.
1. Hubbell # IG4700.
H. Single Isolated Ground Twist Lock - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring
with insulated/isolated ground screw, NEMA L5-20R.
1. Hubbell # IG2301A.
2.03
SWITCHES
A. Single Pole Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet
operating toggle, side/back wiring and ground screw.
1. Hubbell # 1201.
B. Double Pole Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet
1. Hubbell # 1202.
C. Three Way Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet
1. Hubbell # 1203.
D. Four Way Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet
1. Hubbell # 1204.
E. Key Operated Single Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts,
side/back wiring and ground screw.
1. Hubbell # 1221.
F. Key Operated Double Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts,
side/back wiring and ground screw.
1. Hubbell # 1222.
G. Key Operated Three Way Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained
contacts, side/back wiring and ground screw.
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16140
20-14084.00
1.
4 MAY 2015
Hubbell # 1223.
H. Key Operated Four Way Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained
contacts, side/back wiring and ground screw.
1. Hubbell # 1224.
2.04
I.
120 Volt Pilot Light Switch: 20 Ampere, 120 Volt, maintained contacts, single pole single
throw, side/back wiring, red handle illuminated when circuit is energized.
1. Hubbell # 1221PL
J.
277 Volt Pilot Light Switch: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt, maintained contacts, single pole single
throw, side/back wiring, red handle illuminated when circuit is energized.
1. Hubbell # 1221PL7.
WALLBOX DIMMER SWITCHES
A. Preset slide switch type, voltage compensated with built-in filters to minimize audio and
radio frequency interfaces. Each dimmer shall be power matched to the circuit it controls,
using units rated 600W, 1000W, 1500W, and 2000W. Low voltage incandescent lighting
loads dimmed by manual wall dimmers specifically designed for use with low voltage
transformers. Switchplates shall cover the entire face of the dimmer and shall correspond
in material and color with other device coverplates in same area.
2.05 COVERPLATES:
A. Stainless Steel Coverplates:
1. Smooth stainless steel, brushed finish, oversize ( 3-1/8" x 4-7/8" , single gang ),
in configurations up to six (6) gang as indicated on the drawings, screws to match
finish, and openings to match device.
B. Plastic Coverplates:
1. Smooth finish nylon, oversize ( 3-1/8" x 4-7/8" , single gang ), in configurations up
to six (6) gang as indicated on the drawings, screws to match finish, and openings
to match device.
C. Surface Mounted:
1. Corrosion-resistant steel, rounded corners and edges, stainless steel screws, single
or multiple gang as indicated on the drawings. Openings to match device(s) and
construction to match box.
D. Weatherproof:
1. Gasketed, hinged with spring loaded closers, secured with corrosion-resistant screws
and UL listed for wet location.
2.06
DEVICE AND COVERPLATE COLOR/FINISH

A. When the wiring device is flush mounted in public areas the devices shall be WHITE with
WHITE coverplates.
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16140
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B. When the wiring device is flush mounted in the back of house areas, the devices shall be gray
with stainless steel coverplates.
C. Isolated ground devices shall be orange.
D. Devices installed in floor boxes or surface mounted boxes shall be gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install the type device indicated by symbol or legend at the location shown on the plans.
B. Install devices after conductors are pulled and painting is completed.
C. Install devices vertically, unless otherwise noted, with SPST switches having up as "ON"
and receptacles having ground pin at bottom.
D. Where more than one device is indicated at a location, the devices shall be mounted in
combined sectional gang boxes and covered with a single plate.
E. Coordinate location of devices with other trades and architectural features. Do not locate
devices on two different finishes such as half on wall title and half on painted surface.
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16140
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16170
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Description:
1. Provide power wiring to each motor, all mechanical equipment, all kitchen equipment,and all
miscellaneous equipment included in the contract documents. Power wiring is the system of
conductors from the energy source to the equipment that conducts the electrical energy which
does work or provides heat.
2. Provide a disconnect switch, fused where prescribed, for each motor or piece of
equipment.
1. Section 16440: Disconnect Switches
2. Section 16475: Overcurrent Protection
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STARTERS:
A. Provided under Division 15 documents. Installed and wired by Division 16.
2.02 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Motors, mechanical equipment, kitchen equipment, etc., provided under other divisions.
2.03 CONTROL AND INTERLOCK WIRING:
A. Control wiring, (i.e., HVAC controls, remote pushbutton stations, thermostats, etc.), is
excluded except where specifically prescribed in Division 16 documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate all rough-in and final power wiring and equipment connection with other
subcontractors.
B.
Install and connect individually mounted starters provided by other subcontractors.
C.
Label each disconnect switch and starter with name of equipment it serves.
D. Coordinate overcurrent device rating with nameplate of motor or equipment which it protects.
SECTION 16050
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Summary:
A. Description:
1. Identify the following electrical equipment with a nameplate or directory indicating
load served or equipment name:
a. Switchboard, Main and all Branches
b. Transformer
c. Panelboards, Main and Branch Breakers
d. Disconnect Switches and Motor Starters
e. Contactors, Time Switches, and Relays
1.02
Submittals:
A. Sample of Nameplate
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
Nameplates:
A. 277 Volt and 480 Volt equipment - Bakelite Label, red face, white core.
B. 120 Volt, 208 Volt, and 240 Volt - Bakelite Label, black face, white core.
C. Lettering:
1. Main Service Disconnect - 1/2" high letters.
2. All others - 1/4" high letters.
2.02
Panelboard Directory:
A. Panelboard Manufacturers Directory in plastic sleeve on inside of panel cover door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
Installation:
A. Securely mount each nameplate to its respective equipment with screws or epoxy type
cement. Double sided foam core type tape is not acceptable.
B. Type in the branch breaker load information onto the manufacturers panel directory.
Mark all spares in pencil. Install in plastic sleeve on inside of panel cover door.
C. Label all junction box covers with the circuit number installed in the box with a
permanent marker.
SECTION 16050
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16420
SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Summary
A. Description
1. Provide electrical service entrance as shown on the drawings and specifications.
2. Provide transient voltage source suppression for the service entrance.
B. Related Sections
2. Section 16110: Raceways
3. Section 16120: Conductors
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor

A. Provide Transient Voltage Surge Suppression on Service Entrance conductors.
1. Single stage parallel hybrid design transient voltage source suppressor.
a. Line to ground protection
b. U.L. Listed and tested to U.L. 1499, ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45
c. Maximum surge current per phase (8 x 20us) 50,000 amps/phase
d. Withstand 1,000 sequential category C, B1-wave impulses
e. Status alarm monitor
3.0
3.01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Installation
A. Provide service entrance conductors and conduit duct bank as indicated on the drawings.
B. Concrete encase duct bank per NFPA 70, Article 310.
3.02
Utility Company Coordination

A. Provide metering as indicated on the drawings. Obtain and comply with utility company
metering requirements.
B. Obtain requirements for installation of utility company's transformers and primary cabling.
Provide conduits, concrete pads, elbows, Etc. as required by utility company.
C. Coordinate connection requirements of service entrance conductors to utility company
transformer.
SERVICE ENTRANCE
SECTION 16420
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16430
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Summary:
A. Description:
1. Provide a indoor, steel enclosed, dead front, main distribution panelboard with circuit
breakers as specified herein and scheduled on the drawings.
C. Standards:
1. Underwriters Laboratories #891
2. Nema #PB2
3. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code)
1.02
Submittals:
A. Manufacturers Products Data Sheets
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Dimensional Data
a. Top View
b. Floor plan w/conduit openings
c. Side view
d. Front elevation
2. Power/distribution Schematic
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
Manufacturer:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Square D Company
referred to as Square D.
a. General Electric
b. Siemens/ITE
c. Westinghouse
2.02
Main Distribution Panel:
SECTION 16430
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
A. The main distribution panel shall be deadfront with front accessibility required. The main
distribution panelshall be constructed of code gauge steel rigidly welded and bolted together to
support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. The
enclosure shall be painted on all exterior and interior surfaces. The paint finish shall be a medium
light gray, ANSI #49, applied by the electro-deposition process over an iron phosphate pretreatment. All front covers shall be screwed on and removable and all doors shall be hinged with
removable hinge pins. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings.
B. The bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 for
temperature rise. The bus shall be extruded aluminum plated by the ALSTAN 70 or 80
process.
C. Each main distribution panel, as a complete unit, shall be given a single short circuit current
rating by the manufacturer. Such ratings shall be established by the actual tests by the
manufacturer, in accordance with UL specifications, on equipment constructed
similarly to the subject panel.
D. The main distribution panel shall be rated for 240 volts or 480 volts (as indicated on the drawings ,
3 phase, 4 wire service, and UL listed for service entrance.
2.03
Molded Case Circuit Breakers - Mains and Branches

A. Common Characteristics
1. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass reinforced polyester insulating material
providing superior dielectric strength. Current carry components shall be completely isolated
from the handle and the accessory mounting area.
2. Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle operating mechanism which will
provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit breaker shall have common
tripping of all poles.
3. Circuit breakers shall have a push-to-trip button for maintenance and testing purposes.
4. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have International I/O markings, in addition to standard
ON/OFF markings. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking
handle in the "ON" or "OFF" position.
5. Breaker faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity. Breaker faceplate shall indicate UL and IEC
certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding AIC ratings.
6. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed for use with the following accessories: Shunt Trip, Under
Voltage Trip, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm Switch, Ground Fault Shunt Trip, Electrical Operators,
Cylinder Locks, Mechanical Lugs Kits, Compression Lugs Kits, and Handle Accessories.
B. Thermal Magnetic
1. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit with thermal and magnetic trip elements in
each pole. Thermal elements shall be factory calibrated to operate in a 40C ambient
environment. Thermal elements shall be ambient compensating above 40C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
Installation:
SECTION 16430
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
A. Install panel on 3 inch high concrete housekeeping pad. Secure panelboard to

floor and/or walls with anchors approved for the material in which they are installed.
B. Tighten all bolted connections in and to panelboard to torque rating specified per
manufacturers recommendations.
C. Tighten all conductors with mechanical connections, torqued in accordance with the
conductor and/or connector manufacturers markings as well as the values referenced
in the following publications:
1. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Directory (Green Book).
2. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical General Information (White Book).
D. Securely strap all conductors, allowing for sufficient bending radius as specified in NFPA 70.
SECTION 16430
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
`SECTION 16440
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Provide disconnect switches in configurations as indicated on the drawings complete with
enclosures and accessories.
B. Related Sections
2. Division 1: Submittals
3. Section 16170: Motor and Equipment Connections
1.02 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.02
Acceptable Manufacturers as Follows:

1. General Electric
2. Siemens/ITE
3. Square D
4. Westinghouse
DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty (NEMA Type HD) and Underwriters Laboratories
Listed.
B. All switches shall have blades which are fully visible in the "OFF" position when the
switch door is open. All current carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and
promote cool operation. Switches shall have removable arc suppressors where necessary
to permit easy access to line side lugs. Lugs shall be front removable and UL listed for
60 degrees C or 75 degrees C, aluminum or copper wires.
C. Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break such that, during normal operation of the
switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the
operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The
operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Provisions for
padlocking the switch in the "OFF" position with at least three locks shall be provided.
Switches shall have a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch
door when the handle is in the "ON" position, and to prevent closing of the switch
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
SECTION 16440
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
mechanism with the door open. The handle position shall indicate whether the switch is
"ON" or "OFF".
D. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless specified as
NEMA 3R on the plans. Covers on NEMA 1 enclosures shall be attached with pin type
hinges, NEMA 3R covers shall be securable in the open position. NEMA 3R enclosures
for switches thru 200 amperes shall have provisions for interchangeable bolt-on hubs.
Hubs shall be as indicated on the plans. NEMA 3R enclosures shall be manufactured from
galvanized steel. Enclosures shall have a gray baked enamel finish, electrodeposited on
cleaned, phosphatized steel.
E. Switches shall be horsepower rated for ac and/or dc as indicated by the plans. All fusible
switches rated 100 thru 600 amperes at 240 volts and 30 thru 600 amperes at 600 volts shall
have a UL approved method of field conversion from standard Class H fuse spacing to
Class J fuse spacing. The switch also must accept Class R fuses and have provisions for
field installation of a UL listed rejection feature to reject all fuses except Class R. The UL
listed short circuit rating of the switches shall be 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when
Class R or Class J fuses are used with the appropriate rejection scheme. The UL listed
short circuit rating of the switch, when equipped with Class H fuses, shall be 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes. 800 and 1200 ampere switches shall have provisions for Class L
fuses and shall have a UL listed short circuit rating of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switch adjacent to equipment it serves or as located on the plans.
B. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and/or structural surfaces. Coordinate mounting of
disconnects to roof top mechanical equipment with supplier/installer.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
SECTION 16440
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Description:
1. Provide a grounding system for the main building service and each separately
derived system originating at the respective grounding electrode(s) and radiating
to every electrical power controlling and consuming device in the system.
2. Existing grounding system may be reused, verify condition of existing system and compliance
with this section
2. Section 16110: Raceways
3. Section 16120: Conductors
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DRIVEN GROUND RODS:
A. Provide ten (10) feet long, 5/8 inch diameter copperclad steel ground rods.
2.02 EXOTHERMIC WELDS:
A. Provide exothermic copper welds with materials and configuration to match application.
1. Cadweld
2.03 GROUND CLAMPS:
A. Bronze, U.L. listed, with configuration to match application.
1. Burndy
2. Ilsco
3. Thomas & Betts
4. O.Z. Gedney
PART 3 - EXECUTION
GROUNDING
SECTION 16450
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING ELECTRODES:

A. Driven Ground Rods: Install two driven ground rods minimum 10 feet apart, located
outside of building, and as close as possible to the service switchboard but a minimum
of 36" from the building foundation. Locate in non-paved area where feasible.
Install so as to maintain accessibility to top of rod. Provide each with box with
removable cover for inspecting ground rod connection. Install box so that top is flush
with finished grade.
B. Building Steel: Select a connection point on the building steel as close as possible to the
domestic water service entrance that will also remain exposed.
C. Domestic Water Pipe: Select a connection point on the domestic water pipe as close as
possible to the point it enters the building and that will also remain exposed.
D. Sprinkler Water Pipe: Select a connection point on the sprinkler water pipe as close as
possible to the point it enters the building and that will also remain exposed.
3.02 MAIN SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODES BONDING CONDUCTORS:
A. Install a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor between each grounding electrode and its
closest grounding electrode neighbor so that all electrodes are bonded together.
B. Exothermic weld each bonding connection both cable to cable and cable to grounding
electrode.
3.03 MAIN SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR:
A. Install a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor from the closest driven ground rod to the
service switchboard ground bus.
B. Exothermic weld the connection to the ground rod and ground bus.
3.04 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM GROUNDING ELECTRODE:
A. Select a local grounding electrode described by the National Electrical Code and make
connection to a point permanently visible.
3.05 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR:
A. Install a stranded bare copper conductor sized according to NEC between the local
grounding electrode and the separately derived system grounded conductor.
B. Exothermic weld the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode.
3.06 ADDITIONAL BONDS:
A. Gas Service Pipe: Bond gas service pipe at the first accessible point nearest its entry
to the building to the nearest main service grounding electrode with a 3/0 bare
stranded copper conductor. Exothermic weld the connection at grounding electrode
and to a ground clamp at the gas pipe.
GROUNDING
SECTION 16450
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B. Roof Structure: Bond roof structure steel at its nearest accessible point to the
building steel connection point with a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor.
Exothermic weld both connections.
C. Domestic Water Meter: Install bond across water meter with 3/0 stranded bare copper
conductors of sufficient length to accommodate removal of meter. Exothermic weld both
connections to water pipe.
D. Non-metallic Domestic Water Insulated Coupling: Install bond across insulated
coupling with 3/0 stranded bare copper of sufficient length to accommodate removal of
coupling. Exothermic weld both connections to water pipe.
E. Gas Meter: Install bond across gas meter with a 3/0 stranded bare copper conductor
of sufficient length to accommodate removal of meter. Use ground clamps on pipes
and exothermic weld cable to clamps.
F. Telephone Service: Provide a No. 6 bare stranded copper conductor bonded to the
nearest exposed point on the grounding electrode system or the grounding electrode
conductor to the telephone service backboard and leave six(6) feet slack at the
backboard.
3.07 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR:
A. General: Where metallic and non-metallic conduit or enclosures are
used, install a separate insulated copper conductor, color coded green, from respective
switchboard or panelboard ground bus to controller and/or device.
B. All steel conduits entering the main switch shall have a threaded conduit insulated type
"BLG" grounding busing bonded to gether and to the ground bus with a No. 4 bare
stranded copper conductor.
3.08 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS:
A. Roof Top HVAC Units: Install an equipment grounding conductor from the respective
switchboard or panelboard ground bus to the unit disconnect switch and from disconnect
switch to equipment ground lug or to housing in absence of ground lug.
B. Install a separate copper equipment grounding conductor between the respective
ground buses of the following:
1. Main Distribution Panel and each Panelboard
2. Main Distribution Panel and each Transformer
3. Transformer and each Panelboard
4. Panelboard and each Sub-panelboard
C. Isolated Ground Receptacles: Install a separate grounding conductor for each circuit
from panelboard ground bus to isolated ground receptacles on that circuit.
D. Wiring Devices: At both switches and receptacles, provide a grounding jumper from
the device to a screw on the device box.
3.09 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ROUTING:
A. Route equipment grounding conductor with respective feeder, power wiring and branch
GROUNDING
SECTION 16450
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
circuit conductors.
3.10 CONDUITS:
A. All grounding electrode conductors, equipment grounding conductors and bonds where
not internal to equipment enclosures shall be installed in conduit to within 6" of
terminating clamp or exothermic weld.
GROUNDING
SECTION 16450
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Summary:
A. Description:
1. Provide panelboards complete with enclosure, circuit breakers, spaces, trims, covers,
locks and accessories in configurations as indicated on the drawings.
C. Standards:
4. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code)
1.02
Submittals:
B. Shop Drawings
1. Dimensional Data
a. Enclosure Size
b. Gutter Space
c. Cover and Trim
2. Bussing Size
3. Lug Configuration and Ratings
4. Branch Breakers
5. Main Breakers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
Manufacturer:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Square D Company
a. General Electric
b. Siemens/ITE
c. Westinghouse
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 16470
20-14084.00
2.02
4 MAY 2015
General:
A. Panelboards shall be of dead front construction, equipped with thermal magnetic molded
case circuit breakers of frame size and trip ratings as shown on the schedule.
2.03
208Y/120 Volt Panelboards:

A. Circuit Breakers:
1. Circuit breakers shall be Square D or OOB (bolt-on) thermal-magentic, molder case circuit
breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2, or 3-pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous
opening of all poles in multipole circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, tripfree, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action and positive
handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. Bolt-on
(NOOB) circuit breakers shall be able to be installed in the panelboard without requiring
additional mounting hardware.
2. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 489 and shall be rated
240 volts ac maximum with continuous current ratings as noted on the plans. Interrupting
ratings shall be as schedule with a maximum of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240
volts ac. Single pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch fluorescent
lighting loads on a regular basis shall carry the SWD marking.
B. Bussing Assembly and Temperature Rise
1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings
as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests,
conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bus structure shall be insulated. Bus bar
connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or phase
sequence type and shall accept bolt-on (NOOB) circuit breakers. All current carrying parts
of the bus structure shall be plated.
2. Panelboard bussing shall be (copper) (tin plated aluminum).
2.04
480Y/277 Volt Panelboards

A. Circuit Breakers
1. Circuit breakers shall be Square D EHB (bolt- on) thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit
breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2, or 3 pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous
opening of all poles in multipole circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcurrent, tripfree, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick break action and position
handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. Bolt-on
circuit breakers shall be able to be installed in the panelboard without requiring additional
mounting hardware.
2. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 489 and shall be rated
277 volts ac (single pole, 15-30 amperes) or 480Y/277 volts ac (2 and 3 pole, 15-100
amperes) with continuous current ratings as noted on the plans. Interrupting ratings shall be
14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 277 volts ac (single pole) or 480Y/277 volts ac (2 and 3
pole). Single pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch fluorescent lighting
loads on a regular basis shall carry the SWD marking.
B. Bussing Assembly and Temperature Rise:
1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings
as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests,
conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bus structure shall be insulated. Bus bar
connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or phase
sequence type and shall accept bolt-on circuit breakers.
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 16470
20-14084.00
2.
2.05
4 MAY 2015
Panelboard bussing shall be (copper) (tin plated aluminum).
Cabinets and Fronts:

A. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of
steel to be as specified in UL Standard 67 for panelboards. The box shall be fabricated from
galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Each front shall include a door and have a
flush, cylinder tumbler-type lock with catch and spring-loaded stainless steel door pull. All
panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps
which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted
with completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the
locked position. 600A panelboard fronts shall have exposed trim clamps. Column width
fronts shall have exposed hinges and be screw cover type. A circuit directory frame and
card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door.
2.06
Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating

A. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short current rating equal to or greater
than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans.
This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the
panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard
structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device
the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per
Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the
specified panelboard short circuit or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices
for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the
bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable.
Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply
voltage and shall be UL listed.
2.07
UL Listing
A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label. When
used as service entrance device, panelboards shall be listed for use as service equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
Installation:
A. Mount panelboard flush or surface as prescribed with top 6'-6" A.F.F.
B. Key all locks alike and give owner two key per panelboard.
C. For flush mounted panelboards, provide a minimum of three spare 3/4" conduits stubbed
out into ceiling space.
D. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and/or structural surfaces.
E. Where panelboards exceed 42 poles, provide multiple sections with equal size enclosures
with 4" diameter openings with bushings between abutting enclosures.
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 16470
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16475
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Summary:
A. Provide fuses and circuit breakers of ampere rating and U.L. Classification as
indicated on the drawings.
1. Section 16050:
2. Section 16430:
3. Section 16440:
4. Section 16170:
5. Section 16470:
1.02
Electrical General
Main Distribution Panel
Disconnect Switches
Motors and Equipment Connections
Panelboards
Submittals:
A. Product Data
1. Manufacturers: Product Data Sheets
2. Time - Current Characteristic Curves (Average Melt)
3. Current Limitation Curves
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
Manufacturers:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Fuses:
1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Cooper Industries,
Bussmann Division, referred to as Bussmann.
a. Gould Shawmut
3. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Circuit Breakers
1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Square D Company,
a. General Electric
b. Siemens/ITE
c. Westinghouse
3. Circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard or enclosure in
which they are installed.
2.02
Fuses:
SECTION 16475
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
A. Mains, Feeders and Branch Circuits:

1. Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN
LOW-PEAK time-delay fuses KRP-C(amp)SP. Fuses shall employ "0" rings as
positive seals between the end bells and the glass melamine fuse barrel. Fuse
links shall be pure silver (99.9% pure) to limit the short circuit current let-through
values to low levels and comply with NEC Sections requiring component
protection. The terminals shall be peened. Fuses shall be time-delay and shall
hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current
in .01 seconds or less and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. with an
interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL
Class L. Fuses shall be "LOW-PEAK YELLOW" in color.
2. Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN
LOW-PEAK dual-element fuses LPN-RK, LPS-RK, or LPJ. All dual-element fuses
shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. Fuses shall incorporate a
spring activated thermal overload element having a 284 degree Fahrenheit melting
point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit clearing chamber. The
fuse shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds (30A, 250V Class
RK1 case size shall be a minimum of 8 seconds at 500% of rated current) and be
listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc with an interrupting rating of 300,000
amperes RMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be Time-Delay UL Class RK1 or J to
maintain the engineered protection of the system components. Fuses shall be
"LOW-PEAK YELLOW" in color.
B. Spares:
1. Upon completion of the building, the electrical contractor shall provide the Owner
with spare fuses as shown below:
a. 10% (minimum of 3) of each type and rating installed fuses shall be supplied
as spares.
2. BUSSMANN spare fuse cabinet - Catalog No. SFC shall be provided to store
the above spares. The spare fuse cabinet (SFC) shall include a supply of
"LOW-PEAK YELLOW" NOTICE labels.
2.03
Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

A. Description:
1. Circuit breakers shall be Square D FA, KA, LA, NH, PA and/or PC one, two or
three pole molded case circuit breakers rated 15 through 3000 amperes, 120V.ac,
240V.ac, 277V.ac, 480V.ac, as specified on the drawings. Breakers shall have an
interrupting rating to match the panel in which they are installed or as indicated on
the drawings. All circuit breakers shall be UL and CSA listed, IEC 157-1 rated,
meet NEMA Standard AB1-1975 and Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN, when
applicable. Breakers covered under this specification may be installed in
panelboards, switchboards, individual enclosures, motor control centers,
combination motor starters or 1-LINE busway plug-in units.
B. Construction:
1. Molded case circuit breakers shall have overcenter toggle-type mechanisms,
providing quick-make, quick-break action. Breakers shall be calibrated for
operation in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Each circuit breaker shall
have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free. Two and three pole
breakers shall be common trip. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip
unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.
SECTION 16475
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
Circuit breakers with frame sizes greater than 100 amperes shall have variable
magnetic trip elements which are set by a single adjustment (to assure uniform
tripping characteristics in each pole). A push-to-trip button shall be provided on
the cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. the circuit breaker shall
have reverse connection capability and be suitable for mounting and operating
in any position.
C. Terminations:
1. Circuit breakers shall have removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper
and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical
type or compression type lugs.
2.04
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers:

A. Description:
1. Current limiting circuit breakers from Square D shall be I-LIMITER IF (20-100
amperes), IK (110-250 amperes) and shall be rated at (240V.ac) (480V.ac) with an
interrupting rating of 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes. IL current limiting circuit
breakers (300-400 amperes) shall be rated (240V.ac) (480V.ac) with an interrupting
rating of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes. All I-LIMITER circuit breakers shall meet
UL requirements as current limiting circuit breakers, be CSA listed, IEC 157-1 rated,
meet NEMA Standard AB1-1975 and Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN.
B. Construction:
1. Current limiting circuit breakers shall be supplied in molded case construction.
The circuit breaker section shall have an overcenter, trip-free toggle-type
mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action. A push-to-trip button shall be
provided on the cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. The circuit
breaker shall have permanent trip units containing individual thermal and
magnetic trip elements in each pole. The thermal trip element shall be calibrated
for 40 degrees C. ambient temperature. the breaker shall have reverse
connection capability and be suitable for mounting and operating in any position.
C. Terminals:
1. The current limiting circuit breakers shall have removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL
listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for
installation of mechanical type or compression type lugs.
D. Current and Energy Limitation:
1. On high level fault currents, the I-LIMITER circuit breaker shall peak current and
let thru energy and provide a voltage transient-free interruption at near unity
power factor. On fault currents below the threshold of limitation, the I-LIMITER
circuit breaker shall provide conventional overload and short circuit protection.
E. Series Connected Ratings:
1. Combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be recognized by
Underwriters Laboratories and shall appear in the Recognized Component
Directory under the "Circuit Breakers -Series Connected" product category
DKSY2. Current limiting circuit breakers shall allow the use of branch circuit
breakers with lower interrupting capacities on systems capable of delivering fault
currents up to 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480V.ac and 100,000 rms
symmetrical amperes at 600V.ac.
SECTION 16475
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
Installation:
A. Install fuses in all switches shown on the plans which require fuses.
B. Fuses shall not be installed in the switch until equipment is ready to be energized.
C. Install "LOW-PEAK YELLOW" NOTICE labels to alert the end user of the
engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment. They shall be marked
with the proper fuse rating, per the drawings, and placed in a conspicuous location
on the enclosure. These labels are available with the spare fuse cabinet (SFC) and
are also available upon request from Bussmann.
3.02
Installation - Circuit Breakers

A. Install circuit breakers in panelboards, switchboards, distribution
panelboards, and enclosures as shown on the drawings.
B. Terminate wiring into circuit breaker lug. Tighten lug to torque level as marked
on the lug.
SECTION 16475
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Description:
1. Provide lighting fixtures as prescribed in the lighting fixture schedule complete with
housing, junction boxes, ballasts, lamp sockets, lamps, lenses, baffles and trims
installed with support from building structure. Verbal description of fixture in schedule
will take precedence over manufacturer number.
1. Section 16050: Electrical General.
C. Standards:
1. Underwriters Laboratories labeled and listed.
2. CBM Approved
3. ANSI C82.2
4. 1992 National Energy Conservation Act.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
B. Shop Drawings for Custom Fixtures.
C. ITL certified photometric reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHT FIXTURES: As prescribed in lighting fixture schedule.
2.02 FLUORESCENT BALLAST:
A. Electronic: Solid state electronic, Class A sound rating, CBM certified ,90 degree Celsius,
capable of operating one to four lamps.
1. Acceptable manufacturers as follows:
a. Advance
b. Motorola
c. Magnatec
2.03
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLAST:

A.
High Pressure Sodium: Core and coil or constant power autotransformer, high power factor
(92% minimum) starting current less than operating, 5% lamp power variation on 10% line
potential variation, 180 degree Celsius Class H insulation, -20 degree Fahrenheit starting
temperature.
LIGHTING
SECTION 16500
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B. Metal Halide Lamp: Core and coil or constant autotransformer lead-peaked, high power
factor (90% minimum), starting current less than operating, 10% lamp power variation on
10% line potential variation, 180 degree Celsius Class H insulation, -20 degree Fahrenheit
starting temperature.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows:
a. Advance
b. General Electric
c. Universal
d. Jefferson
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Support:
1. Support each fixture from the building structure.
2. Support in a manner that ensures the fixture weight being equally distributed from
each support and the fixture remaining in a level position.
3. Provide support systems capable of carrying 300% of load imposed.
B. For pendant or suspended fixtures mounted to suspended ceilings provide 1/4" steel rods
above the suspended ceiling from building structure to fixture. Provide a minimum of two
supports for each chassis and spaced a maximum of 4 feet on center.
C. For recessed H.I.D. and fluorescent fixtures recessed in a suspended ceiling, provide 2 #10
awg. wire supports from building structure to fixture. Provide a minimum of two supports for
each chassis spaced a maximum of 4 feet on center and located on diagional corners of yhe
fixture. Provide tie down clips to secure fixture to the ceiling grid.
D. For recessed single incandescent, provide #10 AWG steel hanging wire from building
structure to fixture; minimum of 2 separate supports per fixture.
E. For each recessed fixture, provide a trim to match the type ceiling (plaster, grid, exposed
panel, etc.) in which it is being installed.
F. Aim and adjust all fixtures with lamp position, tilt, shutters, rotation or other types of
adjustment during installation. The Architect or his representative will determine the final
aiming and adjustment of such fixtures during the substantial completion job visit. Fixtures
serving areas where daylighting dominates will be adjusted after sunset.
G. Provide electrician with equipment and tools to execute aiming and adjustment instruction.
LIGHTING
SECTION 16500
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 16740
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Description:
1. Provide a complete telephone raceway system including but not limited to conduits,
wood backboard, outlet boxes, and pull strings, beginning with the telephone service
entrance conduit and terminating at each telephone outlet.
B. Work Excluded: Telephone cable, switches, coverplates and instruments.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16050:
2. Section 16110:
3. Section 16120:
4. Section 16450:
Electrical General
Raceways
Boxes
Grounding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer to individual related sections for information on products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Coordinate telephone service entrance with telephone company.
B. Provide 1" conduit from single outlet.
C. Provide a pull-cord in each conduit from outlet to telephone wood backboard.
D. Mount telephone backboard with bottom 1"-0" A.F.F.
E. Mount wall outlets vertical and if shown adjacent to a receptacle, mount with 1"
separation between coverplates.
SECTION 16740
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15050
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
A.
Mechanical basic requirements.
B.
Electric Motors.
C.
Identification.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.3
1.4
Provide complete and fully operational systems with facilities and services to meet
requirements indicated and in accord with applicable codes and ordinances.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire Protection: 2012 International Fire Code with Georgia Amendments.
B.
Plumbing: 2012 International Plumbing Code with Georgia Amendments including all local
amendments. 2012 International Gas Code 2012 with Georgia Amendments .
C.
HVAC: 2012 International Mechanical Code with Georgia Amendments and all local
amendments, NFPA 90A, ASHRAE 90.1-2007.
D.
Energy: 2009 International Energy Coide with 2011 and 2012 supplements and
amendments (ASHRAE 90.1-2007)
E.
Obtain permits, and inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related
systems, Products, and accessories in a single submittal.
B.
Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRIC MOTORS
A.
Voltage, phase and all electrical characteristics shall be obtained from the electrical
drawings and confirmed prior to ordering mechanical equipment.
B.
Electric Service: Refer to Division 16 for required electrical characteristics.
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
All exterior gas pipes shall be painted with a quick dry epoxy based rust inhibitive paint.
END OF SECTION
15010-1
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15070
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Shop drawings and operational data shall be submitted on the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
CONNECTIONS TO ALL EQUIPMENT

A.
1.3
1.4
Cleanouts.
Dielectric couplings.
Hangers and supports.
Valves.
Type of pipe for each service
Hose Bibbs.
The Contractor shall make plumbing connections to all equipment shown on the drawings
and requiring plumbing connections whether such equipment is furnished under another
section of the work, on this section of the work, or specified as Owner furnished. The
Contractor shall install all water pipe, drainage pipe, and equipment hangers to match the
equipment roughing.
TESTING
A.
Concealed work to remain uncovered until required tests have been completed. If
necessary, test on portions of the work may be concealed after being inspected and
defects eliminated. Repair defects that are discovered as a result of inspection or test
with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints, cracks or holes or plugging leaks will not
be accepted. Repeat test after defects have been eliminated.
B.
All soil, waste, vent and storm water piping shall be tested before fixtures are installed by
capping or plugging the openings, filling the entire system with water and allowing it to
stand thus filled for 30 minutes with loss of water. Every piping system or portion of a
system being tested shall be provided with at least one pipe column extending not less
than 10 (ten) feet above the piping being tested so that all joints and pipe tested shall
have been submitted to a test of not less than a 10 (ten) foot head of water.
C.
All potable water pipe shall be tested before fixtures and faucets or low pressure
equipment are connected and before connecting to existing piping systems, by filling the
system with water, and applying a hydrostatic pressure of 150 lbs. per square inch for a
period of 30 minutes without leaks or loss of pressure.
D.
Potable water system shall be disinfected per Federal Specification BB-C-120.

Subsequent water samples must be sent to the local health department for testing. Local
health department approval must be obtained before system is put into service.
E.
The Contractor shall notify the Owner not less than 24 hours prior to each test.
EXISTING UTILITIES
A.
The locations, sizes and elevations of existing utilities as shown on the plans are based
on information available during design. Before commencing with the work, the Contractor
shall verify the actual condition and locations of said utilities and shall notify the Architect
of any discrepancies. No work shall thereafter be performed until the Contractor has
received authorization from the Architect.
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
STANDARDS FOR PLUMBING MATERIALS
15070-1
20-14084.02
A.
2.2
4 MAY 2015
Plumbing materials specified under Division 15 of these specifications shall comply with
the applicable standards required by the materials section of the referenced plumbing
code. See Mechanical General Requirements.
COPPER PIPE
A.
Water pipe buried beyond building: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed with wrought copper
fittings and compression joints.
B.
Water pipe buried under building: Copper Tubing ASTM B88, Type L, annealed with
wrought copper fittings and Grade 95TA solder joints.
C.
Water pipe above grade: Copper Tubing ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, with cast brass
or wrought copper fittings and Grade 95TA solder joints.
D.
Sanitary sewer above slab: ASTM B306 DWV with ASME B16.23 cast bronze or ASME
B16.29 wrougfht copper fittings. Joints ASTM B32 solder grade 50B.
E. Lead-free solder shall be comparable to the following:

1. Harris "Bridget".
2. Harris "Stay-Safe 50".
3. Silvabrite 100.
2.3
2.4
PVC: SANITARY SEWER, WASTE & VENT

A.
PVC ASTM D2729 with ASTM D2855 solvent weld joints with ASTM D2564 solvent
cement.
B.
PVC may not be used above slab where the HVAC uses the space above the ceiling as a
return air plenum.
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE

A.
Coated cast iron soil pipe conforming to ASTM A74 shall be service weight hub and
spigot pattern utilizing service weight hub and spigot fittings and shall be used on the
following services. Joints shall be secured with neoprene compression gaskets.
1.
B.
Coated cast iron soil pipe shall be service weight no-hub pattern utilizing service weight
no-hub pattern fittings and shall be used on the following service. Joints shall be secured
with neoprene compression gaskets and stainless steel couplings with stainless steel
bolts and nuts.
1.
2.
2.5
Underground soil, waste & vent piping.
Above ground soil, waste and vent piping, storm sewer piping 8" diameter and
smaller.
All above ground storm water, soil and waste piping joints shall be "Husky" or
"Clamp-All" stainless steel couplings.
STEEL PIPE
A.
ASTM A-120, Schedule 40, black steel pipe with 150 lb. malleable iron screwed fittings
shall be used on the following services:
1.
Above ground natural gas piping
B.
Fittings for pipe 1-1/2" and smaller in concealed locations shall be Schedule 40 forged
steel socket welding fittings with welded joints. Black 150 pound malleable iron screwed
type fittings may be used in exposed locations.
C.
Fittings for pipe 2" and larger shall be black standard weight seamless steel welding
fittings with welded joints.
15070-2
20-14084.02
2.6
4 MAY 2015
D.
Gas pipe shall not be installed below floor slabs on grade unless specifically called for on
the plans.
E.
Exterior gas pipe shall be coated with black enamel rust prohibitive paint.
VALVES
A.
Valves shall be rated for not less than 125 PSIG steam working pressure at 400 degrees
Fahrenheit.
B.
All gate, globe and angle valves shall be provided with means for packing while open and
under pressure. Valves 2" and smaller shall be all bronze. Valves 2 " and larger shall
be iron body bronze mounted. Ball valves shall be full port type.
C.
Ball valves shall be used for potable water piping 2" and smaller inside the building.
D.
Gate valves shall be used for potable water piping 2 " and larger inside the building.
E.
F.
Jenkins
Milwaukee
Gate valve 2.5"

and larger
326
F2882 F-619
Check valve 2"

and smaller
1222
1509
Check valve 2.5"

and larger
624
F2974 F-918-B
Ball valves 2"

and smaller
32A
BB1-100
NibcoScott
S-413-Y
S-585
or T585
Provide extended tee handles for all ball valves to clear insulation.
2.7
PIPE SLEEVES
A.
Sleeves shall be made from schedule 40 black steel and shall be placed in all masonry
walls and floors where pipes pass through and in all fire or smoke rated dry walls. (Cast
iron soil, waste and vent piping and rainwater piping passing through floor slab-on-grade
excluded. Where these pipes pass through slab-on-grade, pipe shall be wrapped with two
layers of bituminous coated felt.)
B.
All sleeves for insulated pipe shall pass pipe with insulation and shall have a minimum of
5/8" clearance between insulation and sleeve.
C.
Sleeves shall be installed before pipes are installed through masonry walls or floors. Split
sleeves are not acceptable.
D.
Sleeves shall be smooth-cut with burrs removed.
E.
Wall sleeves shall be flush with wall and shall not project beyond the finish surface.
F.
Sleeves through the floors in all spaces, except for floor mounted fixtures, shall project
one inch above the finished floor and adjacent areas.
G.
Pipe shall be centered in sleeves and the annular space between the pipe or insulated
surface and the sleeve shall be packed with glass fiber blanket insulating material to
within " of surface and sealed with fire retardant putty.
H.
Sleeves through exterior walls shall be provided with Thunderline Corp. standard weight
pipe wall sleeve with anchor and water stop plate and Link-Seal Type "C" standard
service insulating type sealing element unit.
15070-3
20-14084.02
2.8
2.9
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - GENERAL

A.
A minimum of one pipe thread shall project through bottom end of hanger insert after
hanger rod is installed. Hanger rods full size of hanger connection shall be used with all
hangers.
B.
Hangers rods shall be black steel and shall be attached to the building framing
components. Attachments to metal deck is not acceptable. Provide beam clamps,
brackets, through bolts, inserts, hanger rod support members and accessories for hanger
installation. Unless otherwise noted, where piping is supported adjacent to walls or
supported from walls, brackets shall be used and these brackets shall be anchored to the
wall, from which the hanger rods shall suspend to support the pipe hangers.
C.
Attach hanger rod supports to the vertical surfaces of concrete building members. Do not
attach supports to horizontal concrete surfaces.
D.
Hangers shall not be sized to include insulation.
E.
All water piping inside the building wall at runout to plumbing fixtures shall be secured to
rigid soil, waste and vent piping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - COPPER PIPE

A.
Hangers for horizontal copper pipe shall be copper plated steel band with malleable iron
nut as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Michigan Hanger Co. No. 100.

Elcen fig. 89.
Grinnell fig. 70.
Hangers for vertical copper pipe not concealed in a building wall shall be copper plated,
malleable iron split ring with wall plate and rod (maximum rod length 2.5").
1.
2.
3.
2.10
4 MAY 2015

Elcen fig. 398 ring with flange.
Grinnell fig. CT-130R.
C.
Water pipe inside pipe spaces or inside stud walls shall be supported from steel support
members between studs or walls. Clamp pipe to steel support with "C" clamp. Wrap
copper tube lines with dielectric tape to isolate copper from steel support member and "C"
clamp. Unistrut Corporation P-2600 Uni-Cushion Rand pipe clamp will be acceptable.
D.
Trapeze hangers are acceptable for multiple pipe runs. Where insulated pipe is installed
on top of trapeze, insulation shall be hard self supporting type for a distance of 12" each
side of trapeze. Provide 12" long 16 gauge galvanized steel saddle for bottom half of
insulation circumference between insulation and trapeze. Uninsulated copper lines
installed on top of trapeze shall be wrapped with Unistrut Uni-Cushion elastomer material
and P-2600 clamp to isolate copper from steel trapeze and pipe clamp.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - PVC, CAST IRON AND STEEL PIPE

A.
Hangers for horizontal cast iron pipe shall be clevis type hanger as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Michigan Hanger Co. Fig. 400.

Elcen fig. 12.
Grinnell fig. 260.
Hangers for vertical cast iron pipe not concealed in a building wall shall be an off-set pipe
clamp as follows:
1.
2.
3.

Elcen fig. 44.
Grinnell No. 103.
15070-4
20-14084.02
2.11
Cast iron soil, waste and vent piping shall be supported within 18" of each joint and at
intervals not to exceed 5 feet on horizontal pipe.
D.
Risers shall be supported at their bases and at floor intervals. Support clamps on risers
shall be installed above the floor sleeve and shall have steel supports from clamps to
floor.
HANGER SPACING
B.
Above ground, horizontal pipe:

1.
Copper or steel pipe shall be supported within 18" of each change of direction
and at maximum intervals as listed in paragraph 3. below.
2.
Cast iron pipe shall be supported at five (5) foot maximum intervals except that
where ten-foot lengths of cast iron soil pipe are used, ten-foot (10-0") maximum
intervals between supports are acceptable. All PVC pipe hangers shall be a
maximum of 6'-0" on center.
3.
Copper Pipe
Steel Pipe
" pipe
3/4"
1"
1 1/4"
1 "
2"
2 "
3"
4" and larger
5 feet
5
6
6
6
8
9
10
10
5 feet
7
7
7
9
10
11
12
12
Above ground, vertical pipe:

1.
Vertical copper pipe shall be supported at each floor level or 16'-0" on centers
whichever is less. Additional pipe supports shall be provided for copper pipes 11/4 inch and smaller at intervals not to exceed 4'-0".
2.
Vertical cast iron soil pipe shall be supported at their bases on concrete or brick
piers and at each floor level or 15'-0" on centers whichever is less.
3.
Vertical steel pipe shall be supported at every other floor level or 30'-0" on centers
whichever is less.
4.
Support clamps on vertical pipe at a floor level shall be installed above the top of
the floor level.
FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES

A.
Floor, wall and ceiling plates shall be installed on all uninsulated, exposed pipes where
they pass through the floors, walls or ceilings. Plates shall have chromium finish. Plates
shall be as follows:
1.
2.
B.
2.13
4 MAY 2015
C.
A.
2.12
Beaton and Corbin.

Ritter.
Omit escutcheons on glass pipe and pack annular space around pipe and caulk as
hereinafter specified for sleeves.
UNIONS
A.
Unions shall be provided in all piping connections to equipment to permit removal and
replacement.
15070-5
20-14084.02
2.14
Flanged equipment connection constitutes union connection.
C.
Unions on drainage pipes on fixture side of traps may be slip or flanged joints with soft
rubber, leather or lead gaskets. All bathtub waste and overflow fittings shall gave sweat
solder joints.
D.
Unions in steel pipe shall be malleable iron unions with brass inserts, where pipe is 2" and
smaller. Unions on lines 2 " and larger to be flanged unions with ring gaskets.
E.
Unions in copper tubing 1 " and larger shall be copper flanged unions with ring gaskets.
Unions in copper tubing " through 1 1/4" size shall be cast bronze or wrought copper
screwed unions with solder connections.
F.
Provide dielectric insulating unions and flanges where noted on drawings and between
dissimilar metals. Dielectric union components shall be of temperature rating to match
service temperature in piping system.
DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
Provide dielectric couplings between copper pipe and steel or iron pipe.
CLEANOUTS - DWV PIPE

A.
Cleanouts shall be accessible.
B.
Cleanouts exposed in NO-HUB pipe shall be NO-HUB cast iron blind cleanout plug.
Cleanouts for exposed pipe shall be Smith 4420 with raised head plug.
C.
Cleanouts in walls shall be cast iron cleanout tee with bronze center tapped plug and
round stainless access cover comparable to Smith 4532-Y.
D.
Cleanouts flush with finished floors shall be adjustable type with round nickel bronze
scoriated top.
E.
2.16
4 MAY 2015
B.
A.
2.15
1.
Cleanouts in slab-on-grade shall be Smith 4028.
2.
Cleanouts in floors with carpet shall be installed below carpet and provided with
optional carpet cleanout marker.
3.
Cleanouts in tile floor shall have square top with tile recess.
Cleanouts installed outdoors in non-paved areas shall be Smith 4248. Provide

18"x18"x6"thick concrete pad around cleanouts except where cleanouts occur in concrete
sidewalks.
STORM SEWER PIPE:

A.
Above and Below slab:

1.
Cast iron soil pipe ASTM A74 service weight with cast iron fittings. Joints shall be
ASTM C564 neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.
2.
PVC ASTM D2729 with PVC fittings and ASTM D2855 solvent weld joints.
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL FOR PIPE INSTALLATION

A.
Horizontal soil or waste piping and rainwater piping shall be installed with a minimum
downward slope of 1/4" per 1 foot for piping 3" and smaller and 1/8" per 1 foot for piping
4" and larger. Verify existing tie-in location elevations before installing new pipes.
15070-6
20-14084.02
3.2
Vent and branch vent pipes shall be so graded and connected as to drip back to the soil
or waste pipe by gravity.
C.
Changes in direction in drainage piping shall be made by the appropriate use of 45

degree wyes, long or short sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth or sixteenth bends, or be a
combination of these or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and quarter
bends may be used to drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from the
horizontal to the vertical.
D.
Unions shall be used in the erection of screwed and/or sweat soldered piping connections
to equipment.
E.
Reducing fittings shall be used in making reductions in size of pipe. (Reducing flanges
and bushing shall not be used.)
F.
Allowance shall be made for contraction and expansion in all piping.
G.
Underground pipe shall be installed with support on trench bottom for full length of pipe.
Excavate for bells and fittings.
H.
Connections between building stubs and piping systems specified under Utilities Division
of the specifications shall be made under this Section of the work.
COPPER PIPE SOLDER JOINTS

Copper pipe solder joints shall be assembled according to the following steps.
1.
Cut ends of pipe square so pipe can bottom into fitting without gaps. Ream inside
of pipe to remove burrs and to return pipe to full inside diameter.
2.
Clean end of pipe and inside of fitting solder cup using fine crocus cloth. Do not
touch cleaned pipe of fitting with hand or glove.
3.
Brush non-corrosive flux on pipe and inside of fitting solder cup.
4.
Assemble with minimum rotation and wipe off excess flux. Heat uniformly both
fitting and pipe until solder begins to melt.
5.
Feed solder all around fitting until fine line appears between fitting and pipe.
Remove heat and continue feeding solder until solder becomes solid.
CAST IRON HUB AND SPIGOT JOINTS

A.
B.
3.4
4 MAY 2015
B.
A.
3.3
Cast iron hub and spigot joints shall be assembled according to the following steps.
1.
Insert gasket into cleaned hub end of pipe.
2.
Apply lubricant to spigot end of pipe and to surface of gasket.
3.
Join pipe using jack type pipe joining tool to force spigot into bell until spigot
touches bottom of bell, displacing body of gasket and forming compression seal
between inside of bell and outside of spigot.
Caulked joints in cast iron drainage and vent pipe and fittings shall be made using lead
and white oakum.
CAST IRON "NO-HUB" JOINTS

A.
Cast iron "no hub" joints shall be assembled according to the following steps:
1.
Push the two spigot ends of cast iron pipe into the neoprene sleeve until both
spigots seat against the separator ring.
15070-7
20-14084.02
2.
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
Position the stainless steel shield over the neoprene sleeve and alternately
tighten the clamps. Use a torque wrench to torque the clamps to the
manufacturer's torque specification for final tightening.
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A.
Where rock is encountered, trenches for underground piping shall be excavated to a

grade 3" below the lowermost part of the pipe and backfilled with sand or gravel to pipe
grade to provide uniform bearing.
B.
After the piping has been installed, tested, and approved, the trenches shall be backfilled
with sand or gravel to the pipe centerline. Hand backfill with earth and tamp to 12" above
the pipe so as not to damage pipe. Remainder of earth backfill shall be done in 6 layers
and mechanically tamped to achieve a minimum 95% compaction on a standard proctor.
C.
Trenches 4'-0" and deeper shall be excavated with the sides sloped at a 45 degree angle
beginning 1 foot above the trench bottom to prevent cave-ins.
CLEANING AND PAINTING

A.
Upon completion of the plumbing work, all piping, insulation and equipment shall be
cleaned of any oil, grease or dirt leaving surfaces ready for painting.
B.
Finished surfaces on equipment shall be left with finish undamaged. Where surfaces
have been damaged, they shall be refinished to their original state using the
manufacturer's finish material.
ABOVE GRADE PIPING

A.
3.8
4 MAY 2015
All piping installed above grade shall be installed parallel to building walls unless
specifically shown otherwise on the plans and shall be installed with a uniform slope or
grade to eliminate undrainable low points.
HANDICAPPED FIXTURE PIPE SHIELDS

A.
Provide safety covers on the drain, p-trap and hot water supply and stop valve under each
handicapped lavatory or sink.
B.
Safety covers shall comply with the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 4.19.4 GSA
and shall be Handy Lav Guard by Truebro or comparable. All shields shall be white in
color.
SERVICE CONNECTIONS:
A.
Contractor shall co-ordinate increased gas load with the gas company.
END OF SECTION
15070-8
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15250
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping insulation, jackets and accessories.
B.
Ductwork insulation, jackets, and lining.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service
or equipment scheduled, locations, and manufacturer's installation instructions.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics, and insulation cements.
B.
Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Glass Fiber: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1.
2.
3.
C.
'K' Value : 0.24 at 75 degrees F.

Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees
Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and
bonded to aluminized film, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt
strips or with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
Jackets
1.
2.2
Owens Corning SSL - II

Rubatex R - 180 - FS
Ceel Tite 320 PVC Jacket
PVC Plastic: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off white
color.
a)
Thickness: 15 mil.
b)
Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. Pressure sensitive color
matching vinyl tape.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Owens Corning
Knauf
15250-1
20-14084.02
3.
B.
R=5.6 installed, 2" thick.

Density: .75 lb/cu ft.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminized film, secured with pressure sensitive tape.
Duct Liner: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.

1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Manville
Flexible Glass Fiber: ASTM C518; flexible, non-combustible blanket.

1.
2.
3.
C.
4 MAY 2015
'K' Value : ASTM C518, 0.26 at 75 degrees F, R=3.8

Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft.
Adhesive: Waterproof fire retardant type.
Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self adhesive pad or welded with press on
head.
Insulated Flexible Duct

1.
2.
3.
R=4.2 minimum
Bidirectional reinforced metalized vapor barrier.
Equal to Thermaflex MKE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A.
Verify that duct work has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Continue insulation vapor barrier through penetrations.
C.
Piping Insulation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
Provide pipe insulation shield at hangers.
For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature, provide
standard jackets. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at equipment, flanges, and
unions.
For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 10
feet above finished floor, finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
For exterior applications, provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate pipe, fittings, joints,
and valves and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover
with aluminum steel jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal
piping.
Insulation on pipe shall be continuous through all hangers and supports.
Duct Liner:
1.
2.
Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.

Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA Standards
15250-2
20-14084.02
3.
4.
3.3
for spacing.
Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow.
Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A.
PIPE SIZE
THICKNESS
ALL
ALL
1"
1/2"
Glass Fiber Insulation
Domestic hot Water

Domestic cold water
3.4
4 MAY 2015
All horizontal rain leaders

All
Insulation thickness 1 where not available for pipe size
1/2" (minimum)
Cold condensate inside building
1/2"
DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE

A.
B.
ALL
THICKNESS
Supply Ducts
2"
Round Return Duct
2"
Duct Liner
1"
All rectangular return duct
15250-3
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 153000
FIRE PROTECTION
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCE TO DIVISION 1:
A.
1.2
The General Conditions are hereby made a part of these Specifications.
SCOPE:
A.
The Contractor shall furnish labor, material, equipment, supervision and services for and
incidental to the installation of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
APPROVED FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTORS:

A.
1.4
Complete wet pipe sprinkler system.

The completed systems shall meet all applicable requirements of NFPA Standards No.
13, and No. 101.
The work shall be installed, tested and ready for operation.
All work shall be in accordance with the owners fire insurance underwriter. Where
insurance underwriter is not determined, the system shall be submitted for approved to
the local fire marshall.
Hydraulic analysis and complete sprinkler drawings.
The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining current fire flow test data to
be used in hydraulic calculation analysis.
If fire flow test result show that water pressure is not sufficient for the fire protection
system, a fire pump and all associated piping shall be furnished and installed. The
General Contractor shall notify the Architect if a fire pump must be installed. The
installation of the pump shall be co-ordinated with the Electrical Contractor.
The system shall be installed by a contractor who is approved and licensed in the state in
which the work will be performed. The contractor shall be regularly engaged in the installation
of automatic sprinkler systems.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A.
The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to in this Section by basic
designation only, form a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the references
thereto. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards:
No. 13
No. 101
1.5
Sprinkler Systems
Life Safety Code
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
The sprinkler contractor shall submit detailed certified shop drawings to, and gain approval
from the engineer and the fire marshal before ordering any material or starting any
construction. Shop drawings shall contain at a minimum hydraulic calculations, detailed
piping, head layouts and cut sheets for all equipment. There shall be no work done until the
engineer and fire marshal approve the shop drawings.
B.
Showing in detail dimensioned piping, sprinkler heads, valves, alarms, drains, test piping,
etc., shall be submitted for approval. These drawings shall show all mains and risers; located
FIRE PROTECTION
153000-1
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
from center lines of columns and shall be used to set sleeves and locate underground pipes.
As the work progresses, drawings shall be coordinated with other trades and dimensions at
the site verified. Drawings shall be revised as required by site conditions. Locations of
sprinkler heads shall be indicated by dimensions to column centers and elevation above the
finished floor.
1.6
1.7
COORDINATION:
A.
Piping shall be offset, relocated or resized or additional piping shall be furnished and installed
as necessary to provide space for other trades. Coordination of the sprinkler work with the
other trades is the responsibility of the Contractor and all changes shall meet approval of the
Architect.
B.
Cutting or patching of structural members without prior approval of the Architect shall be
prohibited. Where sleeves occur through concrete beams, provide the General Contractor
with sleeves of the correct sizes, prior to the pouring of the beams. Where chases occur in
masonry walls, layout accurately for the Masonry Contractor, who shall cut the chases.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
A.
1.8
Upon completion of his work, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect three (3) sets of
"as-built" drawings of the sprinkler work as actually installed.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT LISTS:

A.
Material and equipment shall be the standard catalogued products of manufacturers regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such products. Similar types and items of equipment shall be
produced by the same manufacturer.
B.
The Contractor shall, as soon as possible after award of the Contract, submit for approval a
complete list of all materials, equipment and accessories proposed for installation. This list
shall include catalog identification numbers, drawings, cuts and other descriptive data and
material necessary to completely define all components. Approval of materials and
equipment will be based on manufacturer's published data and will be tentative subject to
submission of complete shop drawings.
C.
All materials and equipment used in the installation of sprinkler work shall be listed as
approved by Underwriters Laboratories List of Approved Equipment, and shall be the latest
design of the manufacturer.
SECTION 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
SPRINKLER HEADS:
A.
All sprinkler heads shall be the approved automatic closed listed dry type of the proper
temperature rating.
B.
Suspended Ceiling: Heads shall be semi-recessed pendent with white finish & escutcheon.
Heads shall be centered in ceiling tile, where installed in a lay-in ceiling. Where ceiling tile is
second look type, install the head centered in one of the 24/24 panels.
C.
Exposed Area: Bronze upright listed dry type heads.
D.
Sidewall: Chrome plated horizontal sidewall with guard.
FIRE PROTECTION
153000-2
20-14084.02
E.
2.2
2.3
Pipe shall be schedule 10 or 40 black steel in accordance with NFPA 13.
B.
Underground pipe: All ferrous metal pipe shall be lined and additionally, steel pipe shall be
coated and wrapped. Joints shall be field coated and wrapped after assembly. Steel pipe
fittings shall be coated, wrapped and lined.
PIPE HANGERS:
The Contractor shall furnish a sprinkler head cabinet installed in Mechanical Room complete
with a sprinkler head wrench and an appropriate number of spare sprinkler heads, six (6)
minimum of each type and temperature rating used in the system.
VALVE BOXES:
Valve Boxes shall be of cast iron, with cover. Boxes shall be of the extension type with screw
or slide type adjustment and with flared base. The minimum thickness of metal shall be
three-sixteenth (3/16) inch. The word "WATER" shall be cast in the cover. Boxes shall be
installed over each outside gate valve unless other-wise indicated or noted on the Drawings.
The boxes shall be of such length as will be adapted without full extension to the depth of
cover required over the pipe at the valve location.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS:

A.
2.7
Pipe hangers shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA Standard No.13.
SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS:
A.
2.6
Heads in sheetrock ceilings and soffits shall be fully concealed with white pop off cover
plates.
A.
A.
2.5
4 MAY 2015
PIPE:
A.
2.4
Fire department connections shall conform to the requirements of NFPA Standard No.13.
The connection shall be the wall mounted type, chrome plated brass consisting of a two-way
siamese hose connection fitted with individual drop clapper, ball drip valve and protective
plugs with chains, and check valves. The unit shall be Seco, Standard General, Potter Romer
or Elkhart. Fire department connection shall be U.L. labeled bronze type. Bronze plate shall
be lettered "AUTO SPRINKLER".
BACKFLOW PREVENTER:
A.
The sprinkler Contractor shall furnish and install a backflow preventer assembly, or double
check valve assembly where required by the local authority having jurisdiction.
3.1
INSTALLATION:
A.
Installation of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA Standard No.13
unless specified otherwise herein. Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for
pipe hanger fastening will not be permitted.
B.
In all areas having ceilings all sprinkler pipes shall be concealed and chrome plated pendant
sprinkler heads are to be used. In all areas having no ceiling, pipes shall be exposed and
brass upright sprinkler heads with guards are to be used.
FIRE PROTECTION
153000-3
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION:
A.
Installation of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA Standard No.13
unless specified otherwise herein. Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for
pipe hanger fastening will not be permitted.
B.
In all areas having ceilings all sprinkler pipes shall be concealed and chrome plated pendant
sprinkler heads are to be used. In all areas having no ceiling, pipes shall be exposed and
brass upright sprinkler heads with guards are to be used. Rubbish rooms to have a minimum
of two sprinkler heads with a 175 degree F fusible link.
FIELD SUPERVISION:
A.
3.3
3.4
The sprinkler work Contractor shall have a responsible representative of his organization at
the site of the work for coordinating this installation with other trades. Details of proposed
departures due to field conditions shall receive written approval of the Architect.
ALARMS:
A.
Equipment necessary to accomplish a local water flow alarm signal shall be installed in each
sprinkler system.
B.
If local authority requires an alarm signal to the local fire department, it shall be provided.
Co-ordinate this with both the Fire Marshall, and the Electrical Engineer.
PIPING:
A.
All interior piping, underground piping and devices comprising the fire protection system shall
be tested in accordance with paragraph 1-11 of NFPA Pamphlet No.13.
B.
Aboveground Pipe:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Pipe used shall withstand a working pressure of not less than 175 psi, in accordance
with NFPA Pamphlet No.13.
Joints, generally, shall be the threaded type. Steel pipe with wall thickness less than
Schedule 30 (in sizes 8 inches and larger) or Schedule 40 (in sizes less than 8 inches)
shall not be joined by threaded fittings, unless a threaded assembly has been
investigated for suitability in automatic sprinkler installations and listed for this service.
Welding methods shall conform to AWS D10.9, Standard For Building Service Piping,
Level AR-3. Welding sections of sprinkler piping in place inside the building shall not
be permitted. Sections of branch lines, cross mains or risers may be shop welded.
Welding sections of sprinkler piping in place inside new buildings under construction
may be permitted only when the construction is non-combustible and no combustible
contents are present and when the welding process is performed in accordance with
NFPA 51B, Standard For Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes.
See section 3-12, NFPA 13, for additional information.
Special couplings approved for use in sprinkler systems may be used in place of
unions and flanged connections where applicable.
Fittings for aboveground piping shall be of a type specifically approved for use in
sprinkler systems.
Reducers: Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece reducing fittings.
Bushings will not be acceptable.
Drains shall be installed in all rises and auxiliary drains at all low points in the systems.
FIRE PROTECTION
153000-4
20-14084.02
8.
4 MAY 2015
An inspector's test drain shall be installed on each sprinkler system near the outer end
of the system. Drains at the low points in the systems shall be approved drum drips
with valves. The installation of drains shall be in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA No.13. Drain valves shall be piped to a safe place of discharge and the
discharge shall be visible either by an open-end drain pipe or a sight-drain fitting.
Plates: Where pipe is exposed chrome plated escutcheon plates shall be installed. No
pipe shall be installed within 16" of the ceiling tile.
C. Underground Pipe:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
NAME PLATES:
A.
3.6
Thrust blocks: Care shall be taken to avoid casing the fitting or bend in concrete to the
extent that it will hamper maintenance. Only the minimum forming necessary to
produce the shape of a structurally sound block of required bearing surface and weight
shall be necessary. Wherever the soil will hold mortar and moisture for a reasonable
curing period, soil forming is acceptable.
Control valves shall conform to requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
shall be in conformance with NFPA No.13 nd shall be gate valves with indicator type,
installed in accordance with NFPA No. 13, locations as shown on Shop Drawings.
Flushing: Before connecting sprinkler system to underground supply connections,
each supply connection shall be flushed out thoroughly in accordance with
requirements of NFPA No.13.
Each major component of equipment shall be marked in accord with NFPA Standards. Signs
shall be provided for all control, drain, test and alarm valves. Signs shall be minimum 20 Ga.
steel metal, pickled and treated, with baked-on enamel white lettering and border on red
background.
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:

A.
All completed work shall remain uncovered if at all possible until required tests have been
completed.
B.
The Architect and Inspecting Authorities shall be notified of tests and shall be represented at
such tests if they so desire. Costs of tests shall be paid by the Contractor.
C.
Aboveground Piping: Tests shall be made with a hydrostatic pressure of 200 psi for two (2)
hours in accordance with NFPA No.13. Tests shall be repeated until work is proven tight at
this pressure. Repairs to piping and equipment shall be made with new material. Caulking of
screw joints or plugging leaks is not acceptable.
D.
Underground Piping: Each portion of the system shall be tested before piping is covered.
Piping shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of not less than 200 psi for a duration of two (2)
hours with leakage not to exceed the amounts shown in NFPA 24, Standard for the
Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. The amount of leakage
shall be measured by pumping from a calibrated container.
END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION
153000-5
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15430
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Floor drains.
B.
Hydrants.
C.
Trap Primers
D.
Pressure reducing valve
E.
Primary and secondary roof drains
F.
Backflow preventers
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Section 15070 - Plumbing Piping.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
B.
ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow

Types.
C.
ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
C.
Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and
finishes.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.

A.
B.
Record actual locations of below slab waste pipe.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded

assembly views.
15430-1
20-14084.02
1.7
4 MAY 2015

A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
FLOOR DRAINS:
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Acceptable manufacturers
a.
b.
c.
B.
2.2
Lacquered galvanized cast iron body with flange, weep holes, reversible clamping
collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer and trap primer connection. Furnish
square frame where installed in tile floor.
HYDRANTS/ HOSE BIBS

A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Acceptable manufacturers
a.
b.
c.
B.
2.3
Jay R. Smith 2005-A

Josam 30000-A
Zurn Z-415
Woodford
Jay R. Smith
Josam
Hydrants shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
TRAP PRIMERS
A.
Trap primers shall be as follows:

Misc. Floor Drains: Precision Plumbing Products PR500 W/ multiple outlets where
required.
2.4
B.
Trap Primers shall be accessible where installed in a wall or case. Furnish Jay R.
Smith 4434 10"x10" minimum access panel. Access panels may not be installed in tile
walls.
C.
Where permitted by local building department, Proset Trap Guards or Sure Seal
S3000V may be used in place of wet trap primers. Trap Guards may not be use in the
oil waste system piping.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE:

A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Watts 223
Febco PRV-2
Wilkins Model 500
Bronze body construction, enlarged diaphragm, and serviceable in line, ASSE 1003.
15430-2
20-14084.02
2.5
4 MAY 2015
PRIMARY ROOF DRAINS:

A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Jay R. Smith 1015 with deck clamp and adjustable extension
2.
Zurn Z-100 with deck clamp and adjustable extension
3.
Josam 21500 with deck clamp and adjustable extension
Showroom Vestibule roof drains to have horizontal discharge:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
2.7
Jay R. Smith 1020 with deck clamp and adjustable extension

Zurn Z100-90 with deck clamp and adjustable extension
Josam 21500-66 with deck clamp and adjustable extension
B.
Lacquered cast iron body with sump, removable polyethylene dome strainer,
membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop with adjustable under
deck clamp, roof sump receiver, waterproofing flange.
C.
Trim all excess roofing membrane inside the drain to fully expose the drain sump.
SECONDARY ROOF DRAINS:

A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Jay R. Smith 1070 with under deck clamp and adjustable extension
2.
Zurn Z-100-W2 with deck clamp and adjustable extension
3.
Josam 21500-AE-16 with extension and deck clamp
B.
Lacquered cast iron body with sump, removable polyethylene dome strainer,
membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop with adjustable under
deck clamp, roof sump receiver, waterproofing flange, PVC standpipe cut to
approximately 2".
C.
Where external dam type of drain is used, trim all excess roofing membrane inside the
drain to fully expose the drain sump
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Backflow preventers shall be in-line, reduced pressure type equal to Watts 009, 909QT
series and ASSE Standard 1013 labeled. Terminate drain with 2 inch air gap.
B.
Provide ball valve and bronze strainer in inlet pipe to each backflow preventer.
C.
Provide backflow preventers where called for on the drawings and at every fixture or
equipment connection not having a 2" air gap or integral vacuum breaker.
D.
Upon completion of installation, backflow preventers shall be inspected and certified by

a licensed inspector and submit copies of certification through Architect for review.
E.
Acceptable manufacturers: Watts, Hersey and Febco.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to
required invert elevations.
15430-3
20-14084.02
3.2
4 MAY 2015
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
15430-4
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15781
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
A.
Packaged roof top unit.
B.
Unit controls.
C.
Roof mounting curb and base.
D.
Maintenance service.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Flashings and counterflashings.
B.
Placement and installation of roof mounting curbs.
C.
Section 16170 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Installation and wiring of thermostats and
other controls components; wiring from unit terminal strip to remote panel.
D.
Section 16170 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring

connections.
REFERENCES
A.
ARI 210 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.
B.
ASHRAE 90.1 - 2007
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and

assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical
characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections.
C.
Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and

assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical
characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections.
D.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Submittals
for project closeout to Owner.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating

instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters'
15781-1
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.7
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.
B.
Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in
place, ready for immediate installation of units.
WARRANTY
A.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
SECTION 2
2.1
2.3
2.4
Provide one additional set of filters.

- PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors.
Trane
Carrier
Lennox
Substitutions not permitted.
AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A.
General: Roof mounted units having gas burner and electric refrigeration.
B.
Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of

cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filters, refrigerant
cooling coil and compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan.
C.
Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under provisions of

Section 16180.
FABRICATION
A.
Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, access doors or removable access
panels with quick fasteners screwdriver operated flush cam type. Structural members
shall be minimum 18 gage, with access doors or removable panels of minimum 20 gage.
B.
Insulation: one inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber with edges protected from erosion.
C.
Heat Exchangers: Aluminized or Stainless steel, of welded construction.
D.
Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive,
adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor or direct
drive as indicated.
E.
Air Filters: One inch thick for 5 tons and less, 2" thick for units above 5 tons, glass fiber
disposable media in metal frames.
F.
Roof Mounting Curb: 14 inches high galvanized steel, channel frame with gaskets, nailer
strips.
BURNER
A.
Gas Burner: Induced draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, pressure
regulator, gas valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame
sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-off pilot.
B.
Gas Burner Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame,
15781-2
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure,
energize blower motor, and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
C.
High Limit Control: Temperature sensor with fixed stop at maximum permissible setting,
de-energize burner on excessive bonnet temperature and energize burner when
temperature drops to lower safe value.
D.
Supply Fan Control: Temperature sensor sensing bonnet temperatures and independent
of burner controls, with provisions for continuous fan operation.
EVAPORATOR COIL
A.
Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and
connection.
B.
Provide capillary tubes or thermostatic expansion valves for units of 6 tons capacity and
less, and thermostatic expansion valves and alternate row circuiting for units 7.5 tons
cooling capacity and larger.
COMPRESSOR
A.
Provide hermetic or semi-hermetic compressors, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted

with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor
overload protection, suction and discharge service valves and gage ports, and filter drier.
B.
Five minute timed off circuit to delay compressor start.
C.
Provide step capacity control by cycling compressors for 7.5 tons and larger
CONDENSER COIL
A.
Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows.
B.
Provide direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overload
protection, wired to operate with compressor.
C.
Provide refrigerant pressure switches to cycle condenser fans.
MIXED AIR CASING

A.
Dampers: Enthalpy Economizer with powered exhaust or barometric relief as indicated on

the drawings.
B.
Motor operated two position outside air damper motor where indicated on the drawings.
OPERATING CONTROLS
A.
Room thermostat shall incorporate:

1.
Automatic switching from heating to cooling.
2.
RTU's shall have seven day programmable thermostat with digital display. Fans
shall run continuously in the "Occupied" mode and cycle during the "Setback"
mode.
3.
Thermostats to be equal to Carrier Debonaire.
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to

beginning work.
15781-3
20-14084.02
3.2
4 MAY 2015
B.
Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings and illustrated by the manufacturer.
C.
Verify that proper power supply is available.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in accordance with NFPA 90A.
C.
Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to protect
ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level.
END OF SECTION
15781-4
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15870
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Roof Exhausters
B.
Ceiling mounted exhaust fan
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 15890 - Ductwork.
B.
Section 15910 - Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.
C.
Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring

connections.
REFERENCES
A.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
C.
AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
D.
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
E.
AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
F.
NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
G.
H.
UL 705 - Power Ventilators.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified
operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement,
spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.
POWER VENTILATORS
15870-1
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ROOF EXHAUSTERS
A.
The only acceptable manufacturers are:

1.
Greenheck
2.
Penn
3.
Cook
B.
Product Requirements:
1.
Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating
Seal.
2.
Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300
3.
Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
4.
UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in
accordance with UL 705.
C.
Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum, resilient mounted
motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 16 gage aluminum birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with
continuous curb gaskets.
D.
Roof Curb: 14" high of galvanized steel with continuously welded seams, and factory
installed nailer strip. FAN CURB CAP CAN NOT BE MORE THAN 1/2 LARGER THAN
THE CURB. Secure the curb cap to the curb on all four sides, one screw each side, two
screws each side where one side larger than 12.
E.
Electrical Characteristics and Components

1.
2.2
Electrical Characteristics shall be as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.
F.
Backdraft Damper: For fans that operate intermittently, gravity actuated, aluminum
multiple blade construction, felt edged with nylon bearings. Fans with continuous
operation do not require backdraft dampers.
G.
Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable
and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set
at mid-position; fan shaft with self aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
CEILING EXHAUST FANS

A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Greenheck
2.
Penn
3.
Cook
B.
Centrifugal Fan Unit: Direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch
acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.
C.
Electrical Characteristics and Components shall be as indicated on the Electrical

Drawings.
1.
Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor

quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box
POWER VENTILATORS
15870-2
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
sized to NFPA 70.

2.
D.
Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor
with wall mounted switch, or multiple speed switch or solid state speed controller as
indicated on the drawings.
Grille: Molded white plastic or aluminum with baked white enamel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install flexible connections specified in Section 15910 between fan inlet and
ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex
between ductwork and fan while running.
C.
Provide sheaves required for final air balance.
D.
Install backdraft dampers on inlet to exhausters as described above.
E.
Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings
lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
POWER VENTILATORS
15870-3
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Air outlets
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate for manufactured products and assemblies, and include
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B.
Product Data: Provide for manufactured products and assemblies, and include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Include instructions for lubrication, filter

replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A.
Shall be furnished by fan manufacturer.
B.
Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller furnished with fans, may be
vendors standard construction.
AIR OUTLETS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Titus
2.
Metalaire
3.
Price
B.
Frame style and mounting shall be coordinated with the ceiling type.
C.
Slot diffusers in show room shall be suitable for installation in 9/16" tee bar ceiling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.
C.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
D.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
E.
Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15880-1
20-14084.02
F.
4 MAY 2015
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 9.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15880-2
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal ductwork.
B.
Casing and plenums.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 15250 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.
B.
Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories.
C.
Section 15880 - Air Distribution..
D.
Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
B.
SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
C.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
D.
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size

round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of
equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and
configuration prior to start of work.
C.
Product Data: Provide data for duct liner.

A.
B.
Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and
type. Show additional fittings used.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
DUCTWORK
Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible.
15890-1
20-14084.02
B.
1.8
1.9
4 MAY 2015
Maintain one copy of document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.

B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
A.
1.10
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A Standards.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by
sealant manufacturers.
B.
Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet,
lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.
B.
Flexible Ducts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Manufacturers: Thermaflex, Clevaflex, Flexmaster.

UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive
supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene
vapor barrier film.
Pressure Rating: 6 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm
Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and
sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide double
thickness turning vanes in supply, return and exhaust.
C.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
D.
Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct
gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip
joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. Wrap joints with 3" wide duct
tape.
E.
Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90
DUCTWORK
15890-2
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
degree conical tee connections may be used.
2.3
F.
Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinal seams will be
sealed with mastic. Snaplock is also acceptable.
G.
Ductmate or W.D.C.I. proprietary duct connection systems will be accepted. Duct

constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturer's guidelines for sheet
gauge, intermediate reinforcement sizing, spacing and joint reinforcement.
MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A.
2.4
Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for
operating pressures indicated.
HANGERS:
A.
Hang and support duct as defined by SMACNA. Hanger spacing not to exceed eight feet.
B.
No duct shall be supported from the roof deck. All hangers, and duct support shall be
suspended from structural roof steel.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
C.
Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
D.
Provide openings in duct work where required to accommodate thermometers and

controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete
with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where
openings are provided in insulated duct work, install insulation material inside a metal
ring.
E.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
F.
Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with
crimp in direction of air flow.
G.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
H.
Sleeves for duct thru cmu or concrete walls: Galvanized Steel.
CLEANING
A.
3.3
Exposed rectangular and round duct shall have paint grip finish. Sheet metal to be either
mill phosphatized or galvannealed.
SCHEDULES
A.
DUCTWORK
DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE
15890-3
20-14084.02
AIR SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Supply
Return & Relief
General Exhaust
Galvanized Steel
Galvanized Steel
Galvanized Steel
B.
4 MAY 2015
GALVANIZED DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
PRESSURE CLASS
Main supply and return drops

from RTUs
2.0 inch water column
All other rectangular supply, return,

exhaust plenums
Round return duct
General exhaust
1.0 inch negative water column
DUCTWORK
15890-4
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15910
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Duct access doors.
B.
Duct test holes.
C.
Fire dampers.
D.
Flexible duct connections.
E.
Volume control dampers.
F.
Spin in fittings
RELATED SECTIONS
A
Section 15890 - Ductwork.
B.
Division 16 - Motor and Equipment Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring

connections.
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
B.
C.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
D.
UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
E.
UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including spin-in fittings.
C.
Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers,
duct access doors. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate for fire dampers and combination fire
and smoke dampers.

A.
B.
Record actual locations of access doors.
15910-1
20-14084.02
1.6
1.9

A.
1.8
4 MAY 2015
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters'

Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish under provisions of Section 01770.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated.
B.
Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick
fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick
insulation with sheet metal cover.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.2
2.3
Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with sash locks.

Up to 18 Inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks
Up to 24 x 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.
Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
DUCT TEST HOLES

A.
Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene
plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B.
Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap.
Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers: Ruskin, Louvers & Dampers Inc, Ventco.
B.
Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.
C.
Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and
lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket.
D.
Curtain Type Dampers: Type B galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide
stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with
15910-2
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
blades completely out of air stream.
2.4
E.
Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated
bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated
steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock.
F.
Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for
combination fire/balancing dampers.
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A.
B.
Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

1.
2.
3.
C.
2.5
2.6
Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA
90A, minimum density 30 per sq yd
Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 wide.
Metal: 3 inch wide, 24 gage galvanized steel.
Furnish flexible connectors for duct connections to RTUs and roof mounted exhaust fans.
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.

A.
B.
Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.
C.
Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72
inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel
frame with suitable hardware.
D.
End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings.
SPIN-IN FITTINGS:
A.
Furnish and install spin in fittings at each round diffuser takeoff.
B.
Fitting for supply shall have scoop and damper with locking handle. Return and exhaust
takeoffs shall have damper only. Where located above a hard ceiling, do not install fittings
with a volume damper unless accessible from an adjacent lay in ceiling..
C.
Spin-ins shall be equal to Shipman S-4. Acceptable manufacturers are Crown and
Clevaflex.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section
15910-3
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
15890 for duct construction and pressure class.

B.
Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated.
C.
Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,
automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere
as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for
shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only.
Review locations prior to fabrication.
D.
Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
E.
Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and smoke dampers at
locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and
where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting
angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings,
bushings and hinges.
F.
Install fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A.
G.
Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
H.
Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with

fans and motorized equipment.
I.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct
widths from duct take-off.
J.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless
of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
15910-4
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15951
CONTROLS
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
1.3
A.
Instruments and control elements.
B.
Sequence of operation.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Control Systems: Thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators, indicating

devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate
mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified. Mechanical contractor shall be
responsible for all control wiring, including both 24V and 120V wiring.
B.
Automatic Temperature Control Systems.
C.
Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments and fine tuning necessary for
complete and fully operational system as described in the sequence of operation indicated
on the drawings.
D.
HVAC Controls Contractor shall furnish all control wiring including 120v control wiring,
and all required transformers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For review indicate complete operating data, schematic system
drawings, and written detailed operational description of sequences.
B.
Product Data: For review provide description and engineering data for each control
system component.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions: For project closeout include:

1.
Systems descriptions, set points, and controls settings and adjustments.
2.
Inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and
calibration tolerances.
3.
Interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified and
numbered, system components and devices.
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Trane, Carrier, Lennox
DAMPERS
A.
Frames: Galvanized steel, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement.
B.
Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches wide, 48 inches long, attached to
minimum 1/2 inch shafts with set screws.
C.
Blade Seals: Neoprene mechanically attached, field replaceable.
D.
Jamb Seals: Spring stainless steel.
E.
Shaft Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings or
Lubricant free, stainless steel, single row, ground, flanged, radial, antifriction type with
extended inner race.
CONTROLS
15951-1
20-14084.02
F.
2.3
Linkage Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon.
Thermostats for the rooftop units shall digital display, 7 day programmable equal to
Debonaire.
EXHAUST FANS
A.
2.5
Control of exhaust fans shall be as indicated on the drawings.
SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
RTU smoke detectors shall be furnished and wired by the mechanical contractor. The
mechanical contractor shall install all smoke detectors.
B.
Detectors shall be located in the return duct prior to dilution by outside air in all RTUs
2,000 cfm and above.
C.
On a detection of smoke, the unit shall be shut down and an audible alarm and visible
strobe initiated in a normally occupied area.
D.
Smoke detector trouble conditions shall be indicated visually or audibly in a normally

ocupied area and shall be identified as smoke detector trouble per NFPA 90A.
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A.
3.2
4 MAY 2015
THERMOSTATS
A.
2.4
Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems

equipment.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide conduit and electrical wiring where required. Refer to Section 16180.
C.
After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment.
END OF SECTION
CONTROLS
15951-2
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
A.
Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B.
Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems. Work is

included in this section and is part of the Contract Sum/Price.
B.
Test and balance not required for shell spaces. Test and balance to be performed only for
white box finish, or where air distribution for a tenant is shown complete with connected
diffusers.
REFERENCES
A.
AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance.
B.
ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.
C.
ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
D.
NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems.
E.
SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 01400.
C.
Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,
adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
D.
Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing,
and equipment data required.
E.
Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
F.
Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, binder manuals, complete with index page and
indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings
with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating
thermostat locations.
G.
Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National
Project Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance.
H.
Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems

specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified by
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
15990-1
20-14084.02
4 MAY 2015
AABC.
B.
2.0
Perform Work under supervision of AABC or NEBB Certified Test and Balance
Technician.
PRODUCTS
Not used
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the
following conditions:
1.
Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2.
Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4.
Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition
to final filters.
5.
Duct systems are clean of debris.
6.
Fans are rotating correctly.
7.
Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8.
Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10.
Air outlets are installed and connected.
11.
Duct system leakage is minimized.
B.
Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of
services which prevent system balance.
Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
C.
3.2
3.3
3.4
PREPARATION
A.
Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B.
Provide additional balancing devices as required.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply
systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design
to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
ADJUSTING
A.
Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that
such disruption has been rectified.
D.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,
closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points
or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
15990-2
20-14084.02
F.
3.5
3.6
4 MAY 2015
Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit
report.
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return,
and exhaust air quantities.
B.
Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional
area of duct.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable
drafts and noise.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do
not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal
devices such as dampers and splitters.
F.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes
required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet
or inlet.
H.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure
drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of
filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for
design conditions.
SCHEDULES
A.
Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units
Fans (ceiling mounted toilet exhaust fans exempt)
Air Inlets and Outlets
B.
Report Forms
1.
Title Page:
a.
Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
b.
Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
c.
Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
d.
Project name
e.
Project location
f.
Project Architect
g.
Project Engineer
h.
Project Contractor
i.
Project altitude
j.
Report date
2.
Summary Comments:
a.
Design versus final performance
b.
Notable characteristics of system
c.
Description of systems operation sequence
d.
Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building
pressurization
e.
Nomenclature used throughout report
f.
Test conditions
3.
Instrument List:
a.
Instrument
b.
Manufacturer
15990-3
20-14084.02
4.
5.
6.
7.
4 MAY 2015
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Range
f.
Calibration date
Electric Motors:
a.
Manufacturer
b.
Model/Frame
c.
HP/BHP
d.
Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
e.
RPM
f.
Service factor
g.
Starter size, rating, heater elements
h.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
Exhaust Fan Data:
a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Air flow, specified and actual
f.
Total static pressure, specified and actual
g.
Inlet pressure
h.
Discharge pressure
i.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
j.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
k.
Fan RPM
Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a.
Room number/location
b.
Design velocity
c.
Design air flow
d.
Test (final) velocity
e.
Test (final) air flow
RTU
a.
Similar to exhaust fan, except external static pressure only.
b.
Supply air
c.
Return Air
d.
Outside Air
END OF SECTION
15990-4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,

concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Footings.
Slabs-on-grade.
Suspended slabs.

1.
2.
3.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and
walks.
Division 2 Section "Decorative Cement Concrete Pavement" for decorative
concrete pavement and walks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or

more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans,
ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with
requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated submit shop drawings via email,
in PDF format.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant adjustments.
Cast-In-Place Concrete
033000 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project

site.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication,

bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar
schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps,
mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete
reinforcement.
D.
Samples: For waterstops and vapor retarder.
E.
Welding certificates.
F.
Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and testing agency.
G.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency,
indicating compliance with requirements:
1.
H.
Aggregates.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Form materials and form-release agents.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Waterstops.
Curing compounds.
Floor and slab treatments.
Bonding agents.
Adhesives.
Vapor retarders.
Semirigid joint filler.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
I.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with

specified tolerances.
J.
Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
033000 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the

same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one
source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural

Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
E.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in

the Contract Documents:
1.
2.
F.
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and

Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete."
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent

bending and damage.
B.
Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight,

dirt, oil, and other contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1.
2.
3.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products
specified.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
products specified.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
033000 - 3
20-14084.00
4.
4 MAY 2015
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete:

Form-facing panels that will provide
continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes
to minimize number of joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved

material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiberreinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or
abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units
with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental
deformation.
D.
Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist

plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
F.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not

bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1.
G.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing

materials.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiberreinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on
forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the
plane of exposed concrete surface.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
033000 - 4
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to
length with ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place.
Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to
CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than
concrete and as follows:
2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
brand, and source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Supplement with the following

a.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better,

graded. Provide aggregates from a single source
1.
2.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.

Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in
cement.
C.
Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
D.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be

compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble
chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium
chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
033000 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
2.7 WATERSTOPS
A.
Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent

passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and
directional changes.
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Greenstreak.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.
Profile: As indicated.
Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick
2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397,
not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or
pressure-sensitive joint tape.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Plus.

Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils.
2.9 CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured

for application to fresh concrete.
1.
B.
Available Products:
a.
Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm.
b.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film.
c.
Euclid Chemical Company; Eucobar.
d.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid.
e.
Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.
f.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con.
g.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.
h.
Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound to be used

on exposed concrete as directed by the project architect: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
1.
Available Products:
033000 - 6
20-14084.00
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4 MAY 2015
Burke by Edoco; Cureseal 1315 WB.

Euclid Chemical Company; Super Diamond Clear VOX.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion.
Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30.
US Mix Products Company; US Spec Radiance UV-25.
2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips:

cellulosic fiber.
ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated
B.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or

styrene butadiene.
2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A.
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that

can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to
match adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended

hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,
conditions, and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested
Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that

can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to
match adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended

hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate,
conditions, and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested
033000 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on
the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
B.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting

proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials

other than portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
Fly Ash: 25 percent maximum
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by

weight of cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
2.
3.
Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in

concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high
temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use
industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be
watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below
0.50.
2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A.
Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: 4.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.

Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: 4.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1.
2.

Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd.
033000 - 8
20-14084.00
3.
4.
4 MAY 2015
Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3
percent.
2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A.
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above
90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that
might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape,

alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual,

as follows:
1.
Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5
horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
2.
F.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure
units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
033000 - 9
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area
of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and
securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in
forms at inconspicuous locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades
providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,
sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent

mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to

manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
1.
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying

with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General:
Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing
reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor
retarder before placing concrete.
033000 - 10
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign
materials that would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum
concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1.
Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports

spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one
mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
3.5 JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not

impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement

across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue
reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into
concrete.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.
Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a
beam-girder intersection.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs,
beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints
into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
033000 - 11
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler

strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation
walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1.
2.
E.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with
finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than
one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.
3.6 WATERSTOPS
A.
Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to

form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and
protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in
waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and

embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement
unless approved by Architect.
1.
C.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing

admixtures to mixture.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness

that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to
cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously,
provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
3.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design

pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according
to ACI 301.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed
layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into
lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion,
limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and
complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing mixture constituents to segregate.
033000 - 12
20-14084.00
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly

worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and opentextured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do
not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,
freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1.
2.
3.
F.
4 MAY 2015
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation,
within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is
complete.
1.
E.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature
within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not
place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen
materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze
agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in
mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1.
2.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled

mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided
water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using
liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing
concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots,
or dry areas.
3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material

with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other
projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
B.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,

arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair
033000 - 13
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed
specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
C.
Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete

where indicated:
1.
D.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten
concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until
producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other
than that created by the rubbing process.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar

unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a
texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of
formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening,

and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded
and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile
amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 1 direction.
1.
C.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if

area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high
spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left
with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1.
D.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded
cementitious floor finishes.
Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with
fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sandbed terrazzo.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate
concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and
restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and
appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.
033000 - 14
20-14084.00
1.
2.
E.
4 MAY 2015
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with

resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage
membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.
Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a
randomly trafficked floor surface:
a.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25;
with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness,
F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic
or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While
concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1.
F.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor
surfaces.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by

brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise
indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as
specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous
concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete
is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment
at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer
furnishing machines and equipment.
D.
Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and
associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed,
tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.
033000 - 15
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold
or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and
ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if

hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h
before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but
before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,

supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period,
moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period,
continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure

unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other
surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following

methods:
1.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray

or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a.
2.
After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing
compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing
compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on
Project.
Curing and Sealing Compound at areas of exposed concrete as directed by

the architect: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous
operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second
coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
033000 - 16
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland
cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only
enough water for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on
the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by
cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and
voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less
than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.
Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding
agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has
dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland
cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar
will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to
verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact
mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability
and structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for
finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high
areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a
sloped template.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,

popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
(0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through
unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable
conditions.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer
according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth,
uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less
in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove
defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with
at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in
contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching
033000 - 17
20-14084.00
6.
4 MAY 2015
concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without

coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished
concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with
patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete
and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete
surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent
concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy

adhesive and patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to
Architect's approval.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing
and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
B.
Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Steel reinforcement placement.

Steel reinforcement welding.
Headed bolts and studs.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from
beams and slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according

to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of
each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd. , plus one
set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
a.
2.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressivestrength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted
from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if
fewer than five are used.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each
composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
033000 - 18
20-14084.00
3.
4.
5.
6.
concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency

appears to change.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;
ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight
concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for
each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air
temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one
test for each composite sample.
Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight
concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for
each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
7.
4 MAY 2015
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens
for each composite sample.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two

laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28
days.
a.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two
specimens at 28 days.
b.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength
from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample
and tested at age indicated.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any
three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified
compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below
specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer,
and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength
tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete
placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of
concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete
mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type
of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing:
Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other
nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as
sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of
concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive
strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by
Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M
or by other methods as directed by Architect.
033000 - 19
20-14084.00
12.
13.
4 MAY 2015
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed

to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified
requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate
dos not comply with the Contract Documents.
033000 - 20
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL
A.

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
B.
Structural steel.
Grout.

1.
2.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency

procedures and administrative requirements.
Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract

Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand
ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions
indicated.
1.
Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and

AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design,"
Volume 2, Part 9 AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress
Design," Part 4.
B.
Construction: Type FR, fully restrained.
C.
Construction: Type 1, rigid frame.
Structural Steel Framing
051200 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other

pertinent data.
Include embedment drawings.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and
field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field
bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted
connections.
For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads,
include structural analysis data prepared by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
Provide all shop drawings in emailed, PDF format.
C.
D.
Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products
comply with requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.

Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical
analysis.
Direct-tension indicators.
Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
Shear stud connectors.
Shop primers.
Nonshrink grout.
Source quality-control test reports.
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC

Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant,
Category Cbd.
C.

Welding Code--Steel."
051200 - 2
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement
No. 2."
AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design
and Plastic Design."
AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections."
AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
A.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and
spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and
deterioration.
1.
2.
Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts
that become dry or rusty before use.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,
damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace
damaged materials or structures as directed.
1.8 COORDINATION
B.
Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates,
instructions, and directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, Grade 50.
B.
Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B, structural tubing.
E.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

1.
2.
Weight Class: Standard.

Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.
051200 - 3
20-14084.00
F.
4 MAY 2015
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436
hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
2.
Finish: Plain.
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible-washer type.
a.
B.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel
structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends];
ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel
washers, plain.
1.
C.
Finish: Plain.
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible-washer type,

plain.
Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1,

heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A563 heavy hex
carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
Finish: Plain.
D.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type,
cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
E.
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554 Gr 36, Grade A, straight.

1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.

Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain.
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A.

1.
2.
3.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.

Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain.
2.3 PRIMER
A.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd.
051200 - 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rustinhibiting primer.
C.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.4 GROUT
A.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 404, Size No. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by
volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
B.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:

ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged,
nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to
consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.5 FABRICATION
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible.

Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress
Design and Plastic Design."
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements,

including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges" for structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural
steel.
1.
2.
C.
Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface

blemishes including pitting, rust, scale and roughness.
Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before
cleaning, treating, and shop priming.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1.
D.
Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6/ A6M and
maintain markings until structural steel has been erected.
Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before
starting shop-priming operations.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes
perpendicular to metal surfaces.
051200 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
E.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting

bearing loads.
F.
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according
to SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
G.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of

shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors
according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
H.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for
passage of other work through steel framing members.
1.
2.
3.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally

cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.
Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes
perpendicular to steel surfaces.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive
other work.
2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt
and type of joint specified.
1.
B.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications,
tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting
welding work.
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially

embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
Galvanized surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill
scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following
specifications and standards:
051200 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
C.
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full
coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
D.
Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00,
"Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems,"
to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
2.8 GALVANIZING
A.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural
steel according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.
1.
2.
Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.

Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and
located in exterior walls.
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is

being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not
comply with the Contract Documents.
C.
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected

according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts."
D.
Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections

will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection
procedures, at testing agency's option:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not
be accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and

inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
051200 - 7
20-14084.00
1.
2.
4 MAY 2015
Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-thancontinuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture
occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in
AWS D1.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
3.1
A.
Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of

anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for
compliance with requirements.
B.
PREPARATION
3.2
A.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction
loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports
when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless
1.
Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction

until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
ERECTION
3.3
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and

according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design."
B.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bondreducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates.
Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.
1.
2.
3.
Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or
setting nuts as required.
Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned
and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off
flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout.
051200 - 8
20-14084.00
4.
C.
4 MAY 2015
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing
plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and
allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions
for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure
before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other
surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary
adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
D.
Splice members only where indicated.
E.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish
thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1.
F.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes
that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
FIELD CONNECTIONS
3.4
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of
bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
B.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications,
tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting
welding work.
1.
Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress
Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,
alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
3.5
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B.
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected

according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A 490
Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
051200 - 9
20-14084.00
1.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to

AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's
option:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
4 MAY 2015
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass
and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or
penetration will not be accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not
comply with the Contract Documents.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
3.6
A.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair

paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or

reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists
and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel.
1.
2.
C.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3

power-tool cleaning.
Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent
surfaces.
Touchup Painting:
painting Sections.
Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9
051200 - 10
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL
A.

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
K-series steel joists.

KCS-type K-series steel joists.
Joist Girders
Joist accessories.

1.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing bearing plates in
unit masonry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.
SJI "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and
Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B.
Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to

support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load
tables in SJI's "Specifications."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of
joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories;
splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
1.
C.
Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other

construction.
Steel Joist Framing
052100 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
D.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply

with requirements.
E.
Mill Certificates: Signed by bolt manufacturers certifying that bolts comply with
requirements.
F.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
G.
H.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For joists.
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists

complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI
"Specifications."
1.
Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering

services for designing special joists to comply with performance
requirements.
B.
SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that

are applicable to types of joists indicated.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
A.
Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
B.
Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A.
Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into masonry construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.
Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.
Steel Joist Framing
052100 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel,

hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened
steel washers.
1.
D.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 , Type 1, heavy hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436
hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
E.
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.2 PRIMERS
F.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with

performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
2.3 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A.
Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for

Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and
bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
1.
Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.
B.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance,
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
C.
Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to
joists.
D.
Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord
extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
E.
Do not camber joists.
F.
Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped
shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A.
Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal and/or

diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for
Steel Joist Framing
052100 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if
required for stability.
B.
Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's

"Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
C.
Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish

additional erection bridging if required for stability.
D.
Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses
indicated. Shop prime paint.
E.
Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 5 Section
"Metal Fabrications."
F.
Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate

extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to
within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist installation.
2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A.
Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from
fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2.
B.
Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
C.
Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a
continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
3.1
A.
Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural

framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
INSTALLATION
3.2
A.
Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
Steel Joist Framing
052100 - 4
20-14084.00
B.
4 MAY 2015
Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to
supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's
written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one
piece.
Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently
fastening.
Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to
ensure that joists are stabilized during construction.
C.
Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate
welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS
requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
D.
Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction
loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if
terminating at walls or beams.
3.3
A.
agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.
B.
Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Bolted connections will be visually inspected.
D.
High-strength, field-bolted connections will be tested and verified according to

procedures in RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
ASTM A490 Bolts."
E.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not
in compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work

with specified requirements.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
3.4
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer that ensure that joists and accessories are without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Steel Joist Framing
052100 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
Steel Joist Framing
052100 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2014
SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL
A.

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
B.
Roof deck.
Composite floor deck.

1.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop- and field-welded shear
connectors.
2.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with
miscellaneous steel shapes.
3.
Division 9 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details,
reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and
attachments to other construction.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.
D.
E.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with
requirements:
1.
G.
Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
Steel Decking
053100 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2014
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to

ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B.

Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
C.
AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck

according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members."
A.
Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
B.
Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with
a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
Steel Deck:
a.
Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division.
2.2 ROOF DECK
A.
Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply
with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication
No. 30, and with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Steel Decking
Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS),

Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on,
rust-inhibitive primer.
a.
Color: Manufacturer's standard
Deck Profile: As indicated
Profile Depth: As indicated
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated
Span Condition: Triple span or more.
053100 - 2
20-14084.00
6.
4 MAY 2014
Side Laps: Overlapped.
2.3 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK
A.
Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck

panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel
Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties
indicated, and with the following:
1.
2.
Uncoated Steel Sheet:

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grade 33 minimum.
Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grade 33 minimum, with underside surface shop primed with
manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
a.
3.
4.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33

zinc coating.
Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural
Steel (SS), Grade 33 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with
manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
a.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Color: Manufacturer's standard.
Color: Manufacturer's standard.
Profile Depth: As indicated.

Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
Span Condition: Triple span or more.
Side Laps: Overlapped.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply
with requirements indicated.
B.
Mechanical Fasteners:
Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or
pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C.
Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling,

carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D.
Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength
of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of
same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
Steel Decking
053100 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2014
F.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI
Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.
G.
Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same
material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with
floor deck.
I.
Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and
finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.
J.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a

minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
K.
Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as

primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and

commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
B.
Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection
limitations.
C.
Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D.
Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently
fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
E.
Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
F.
Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to deck.
Steel Decking
053100 - 4
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2014
G.
Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for

strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding
work.
3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A.
Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of
the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is
not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of
panels between supports, at intervals indicated.
1.
C.
Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and

weld.
Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips,
end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written
instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1.
F.
End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractor's option.
Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and
weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at
least one weld at each corner.
1.
E.
Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel

screws.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing
of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:
1.
D.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.

Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of
two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated.
Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless

Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and
where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written
instructions to ensure complete closure.
Steel Decking
053100 - 5
20-14084.00
3.2
4 MAY 2014
FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION
A.
Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of
the surface diameter indicated and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of
panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or
36 inches , and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.

Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional
welds an average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart.
Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.
Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel

screws.
Mechanically clinch or button punch.
Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing
of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:
1.
End Joints: Lapped.
D.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to
supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Zclosures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting
closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.
F.
Install piercing hanger tabs at 14 inches apart in both directions, within 9 inches of
walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides unless otherwise
indicated.
A.
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C.
Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor
and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E.
Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
Steel Decking
053100 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2014
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both

surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both
surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair
paint.
C.
Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds,
and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Division 9 Section.
D.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 31 00
Steel Decking
053100 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1
A.

Section.
SUMMARY
1.2
A.

1.
Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
B.

1.
2.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and

connections.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing,
metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
1.3
A.
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory
indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed
metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including
mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental
framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and
attachment to adjoining work.
C.
D.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
E.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated,
indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steel sheet.
Expansion anchors.
Power-actuated anchors.
Mechanical fasteners.
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
054000 - 1
20-14084.00
5.
6.
7.
F.
4 MAY 2015
Vertical deflection clips.

Horizontal drift deflection clips
Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the
testing indicated.
B.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing

agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet
complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile
strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet
Steel."
D.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal

framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
AISI Specifications and Standards:

Comply with AISI's "North American
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its
"Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."
1.5
A.
Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage
during delivery, storage, and handling.
B.
Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate
to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Clark Steel Framing.
2.
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
054000 - 2
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
2.2 MATERIALS
A.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of
grade and coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Grade: ST33H or ST50H

Coating: G90 or equivalent.
Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc
coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1.
2.
Grade: 50, Class 1 or 2.

Coating: G90.
2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A.
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths

indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths

indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on the drawings

Flange Width: As indicated on the drawings
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless noted otherwise on the

drawings
Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.
Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of

accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure
through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
1.
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.

The Steel Network, Inc.
2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M,

Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used
for framing members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless

otherwise indicated, as follows:
054000 - 3
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
4 MAY 2015
Supplementary framing.
Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
Web stiffeners.
Anchor clips.
End clips.
Foundation clips.
Gusset plates.
Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.
Joist hangers and end closures.
Hole reinforcing plates.
Backer plates.
2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
B.
Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, selftapping steel drill screws.
1.
C.
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard

elsewhere.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: [SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035] [ASTM A 780].
B.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with
minimum water required for placement and hydration.
C.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.
D.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track
members.
2.7 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to
line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's
054000 - 4
20-14084.00
specifications and standards,

requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
written
instructions,
and
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening,
clinch fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of
framing members is not permitted.
a.
b.
4.
manufacturer's
4 MAY 2015
Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings,
with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three
exposed screw threads.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or

screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery,

and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent
distortion.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a

maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1.
2.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8
inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum
fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a
maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
054000 - 5
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or
rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a
uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it

may be field assembled.
B.
Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed

Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to

supporting structure.
1.
D.
Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to

produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and
true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.
Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line,
and with connections securely fastened.
1.
2.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening,
clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not
permitted.
a.
b.
Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings,
and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and
screw penetration.
E.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are

indicated for track or tension members.
F.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads
comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain
braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting
structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G.
Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal
framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.
054000 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
H.
Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up

exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at
openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of
manufacturer's standard punched openings.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to
line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as
follows:
1.
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening
requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely
anchor to supporting structure as indicated.
B.
Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated.
Space studs as follows:
1.
Stud Spacing: As indicated.
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb
walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D.
Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer

of vertical loads while providing lateral support.
1.
Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building
structure.
E.
Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings
but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1.
Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's
F.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web

stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to
provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
A.
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
054000 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated

and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
054000 - 8
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1
A.

Section.
SUMMARY
1.2
A.

1.
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
2.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are
not specified in other Sections.
3.
Elevator machine beams and hoist beams.
4.
Support angles for elevator door sills.
5.
Shelf angles.
6.
Loose bearing and leveling plates.
7.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other
Sections.
8.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1.
2.
C.
Metal ladders.
Loose steel lintels.

Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast
into concrete or built into unit masonry.

1.
2.
3.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel

pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into
concrete.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
Division 14 Section "Hydraulic Elevators" for elevator pit ladders and support
angles for elevator door sills.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 1
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
1.3
A.
Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the

effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in
ANSI A14.3.
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range):

surfaces.
120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material
SUBMITTALS
1.4
A.
Product Data: For the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.

Metal nosings and treads.
Paint products.
Grout.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
2.
3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other
Sections.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
D.
E.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1.
2.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 2
20-14084.00
3.
4.
4 MAY 2015
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
COORDINATION
1.6
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
B.
Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that
are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
2.1
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products
specified.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
products specified.
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the manufacturers specified.
METALS, GENERAL
2.2
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed
Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or
blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
2.3
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 3
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
C.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 .
D.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
F.
Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac.

W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT.
G.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
H.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another
weight is indicated or required by structural loads.
I.
Slotted Channel Framing:

complying with MFMA-3.
1.
2.
3.
Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot
Size of Channels: As indicated.

Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural
steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.064-inch nominal thickness.
Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel,
Grade 33; 0.0528-inch minimum thickness; unfinished.
NONFERROUS METALS
2.4
A.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
C.
Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
D.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
E.
Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000
(muntz metal, 60 percent copper).
F.
Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural
bronze).
G.
Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or
No. C84400 (leaded semired brass).
H.
Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 4
20-14084.00
I.
4 MAY 2015
Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
bronze).
FASTENERS
2.5
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening
aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A325, Grade A; with hex
nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel

bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and
ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.
D.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1.
Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where

item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
G.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
H.
Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
I.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
J.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
K.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a

load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
L.
Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either

ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A 27M cast steel. Provide
bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 5
20-14084.00
1.
2.
4 MAY 2015
Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zincplated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts
complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.
2.6
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
B.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
C.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modifiedalkyd primer complying with MPI#79.
1.
D.
Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible

with topcoat.
1.
2.
Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19.

Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621.
ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313.
International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.
Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
E.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in

steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
F.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
2.7
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 6
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges
to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp
or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain

separation or otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded
surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints
where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a

manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish
hardware, screws, and similar items.
I.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.

Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support
indicated loads.
1.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry,
equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a
minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from
ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
2.8
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as
needed to complete the Work.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 7
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut,
drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
C.
Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes
of sizes indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel
pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill baseplates and top
plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around.
Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
E.
Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.

Drill girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.
Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill
holes at 24 inches o.c.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch baseplates with four 5/8-inch
anchor bolts and 1/4-inch top plates.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
2.9
A.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld
adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
B.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.10 SHELF ANGLES

A.
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts,
spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
Provide mitered and welded units at corners.

Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make
open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B.
For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup
masonry and concrete.
C.
Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 8
20-14084.00
D.
4 MAY 2015
Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf

angles to cast-in-place concrete.
2.11 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A.
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B.
Galvanize plates after fabrication.
2.12 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A.
Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items
supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide
each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for
embedding in concrete.
2.13 METAL LADDERS

A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.

For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c.
with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.

Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail
faces.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with
aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of
manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.
Available Products:
a.
b.
6.
7.
IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac.

W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT.
Galvanize exterior ladders and interior ladders, where indicated, including

brackets and fasteners.
Prime exterior ladders and interior ladders, where indicated, including
brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 9
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL

A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable

standard listed below:
1.
2.
B.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply

with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation
specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal
fabrications:
1.
2.
C.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast

Cleaning."
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications,

except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete,
sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance
Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of
rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld

connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted
or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 10
20-14084.00
1.
2.
3.
4.
4 MAY 2015
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded
surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide
threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through
bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built
into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
3.4
A.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements
indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building
structure.
1.
C.
Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on
concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling
Plates" Article.
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and
grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates"
Article.
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
3.5
A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and

roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before
packing with grout.
1.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no
voids remain.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 11
20-14084.00
4 MAY 2015
3.6
A.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.
Metal Fabrications
055000 - 12

Project Manual - Buildings 100, 300, 400, 500, 600 - Sugarloaf Market

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Project Manual - Buildings 100, 300, 400, 500, 600 - Sugarloaf Market

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE

WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

DOORS AND WINDOWS

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012500

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

Startup construction schedule.

Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

Startup construction schedule.

Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

Working electronic copy of schedule file and an PDF electronic file.

Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days, unless

Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

Coordination with existing construction.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.

STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be

Preparation and processing of submittals.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on

Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by

Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.

Identification of activities that have changed.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

List of subcontractors at Project site.

Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,

Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

END OF SECTION 013200

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

Scheduled date for first submittal.

SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination